Mercedes - 300SL - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: Apple® iOS Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Android™ Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App: 1175841002Z102 É1175841002Z102TËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29 Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 41 Opening and closing ........................... 85 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 111 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 125 Climate control ................................. 143 Driving and parking .......................... 163 On-board computer and displays .... 245 Stowing and features ....................... 315 Maintenance and care ...................... 333 Breakdown assistance ..................... 349 Wheels and tyres .............................. 369 Technical data ................................... 399 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC Display message ............................ 297 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 215 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 266 Function/notes ................................ 73 Important safety notes .................... 73 Warning lamp ................................. 304 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 154 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 149 Active light function ......................... 130 Active Parking Assist Detecting parking spaces .............. 221 Display message ............................ 288 Exiting a parking space .................. 224 Function/notes ............................. 220 Important safety notes .................. 220 Parking .......................................... 222 Towing a trailer .............................. 220 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 80 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 75 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 76 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 215 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 283 Function/notes ............................. 131 Switching on/off ........................... 132 Additional speedometer ................... 258 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 408 Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 128 Air conditioning General notes ................................ 144 Air filter (white display message) .... 286 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes .................. 161 Rear ............................................... 162 Setting the centre air vents ........... 162 Setting the side air vents ............... 162 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation .......................... 51 Introduction ..................................... 48 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 43 Airbags Display message ............................ 278 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 49 Important safety guidelines ............. 48 Kneebag ........................................... 50 Sidebag ............................................ 50 Triggering ......................................... 57 Windowbag ...................................... 51 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 81 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 81 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 81 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) AMG Performance Seat .......................... 117 RIDE CONTROL sports suspension ................................................ 215 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 262 AMG Performance exhaust system ..................................................... 172 Anti-glare film .................................... 331 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 198 Index Ashtray ............................................... 327 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 255 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 255 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 340 Driving abroad ............................... 340 Hiding a service message .............. 340 Information about Service ............. 340 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 340 Service message ............................ 339 Special service requirements ......... 340 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 81 Function ........................................... 81 Switching off the alarm .................... 81 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 257 Display message ............................ 286 Function/notes ............................. 230 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 253 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 282 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 171 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 170 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 278 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 52 Problems ......................................... 56 System self-test ............................... 54 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 127 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 182 Changing gear ............................... 182 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 177 Drive program display .................... 178 Drive programs .............................. 183 Driving tips .................................... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............................................... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients .............................. Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Overview ........................................ Problem (fault) ............................... Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Trailer towing ................................. Transmission position display ........ Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... Auxiliary heating Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Remote control .............................. Setting ........................................... Auxiliary heating/ventilation Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Problem (display message) ............ Setting the departure time ............. Auxiliary ventilation Activating/deactivating ................. 182 174 175 188 180 179 181 179 179 178 182 182 185 262 177 188 168 180 168 185 183 180 178 181 188 157 157 157 260 298 156 161 159 157 5 6 Index Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. 157 Remote control .............................. 157 Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ...................................................... 412 B Bag hook ............................................ 321 Ball coupling Folding in ....................................... 241 Folding out ..................................... 240 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 73 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 90 Important safety notes .................... 89 Replacing ......................................... 90 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 359 Display message ............................ 284 Important safety notes .................. 356 Jump starting ................................. 360 Belt see Seat belts Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 57 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 257 Display message ............................ 288 Notes/function .............................. 234 Trailer towing ................................. 236 Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) ............................................... 334 Closing ........................................... 336 Display message ............................ 297 Important safety notes .................. 334 Opening ......................................... 335 Boot lid see Tailgate Boot load (maximum) ........................ 410 Brake EBD .................................................. 80 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 273 Notes ............................................. 408 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 76 Changing bulbs .............................. 137 Display message ............................ 280 Brakes ABS .................................................. 73 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75 BAS .................................................. 73 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 408 Display message ............................ 266 Driving tips .................................... 197 Hill start assist ............................... 169 HOLD function ............................... 211 Important safety notes .................. 197 Parking brake ................................ 193 Warning lamp ................................. 303 Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 350 see Flat tyre see Tow-starting see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 32 Buttons on the steering column ...... 247 C Calling up a fault see Display messages Car see Vehicle Car wash (care) ................................. Care Automatic car wash ....................... Carpets .......................................... Display ........................................... Exhaust pipe .................................. Exterior lighting ............................. Gear or selector lever .................... High-pressure cleaner .................... Interior ........................................... Matt paintwork .............................. Notes ............................................. Paint .............................................. 341 341 347 346 345 344 346 342 346 342 340 342 Index Plastic trim .................................... 346 Reversing camera .......................... 344 Roof lining ...................................... 347 Seat belt ........................................ 347 Seat cover ..................................... 346 Sensors ......................................... 344 Steering wheel ............................... 346 Trim pieces .................................... 346 Washing by hand ........................... 341 Wheels ........................................... 343 Windows ........................................ 343 Wiper blades .................................. 344 Wooden trim .................................. 346 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 253 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 260 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 87 Centre console Lower section .................................. 37 Upper section .................................. 36 Changing bulbs Brake lamps ................................... 137 Cornering light function ................. 136 Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 135 Main-beam headlamps ................... 136 Rear foglamp ................................. 137 Turn signals (front) ......................... 136 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 137 Child Restraint system .............................. 60 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 65 ISOFIX .............................................. 61 On the front-passenger seat ............ 63 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64 Recommendations ........................... 69 Suitable positions ............................ 65 Top Tether ....................................... 62 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 71 Rear doors ....................................... 71 Cigarette lighter ................................ 328 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 344 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 345 Climate control Air conditioning ............................. 145 Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 156 Controlling automatically ............... 150 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 154 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 149 Demisting the windows .................. 152 Demisting the windscreen ............. 152 Indicator lamp ................................ 150 Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .................................. 147 Notes on using the air-conditioning system ..................................... 145 Overview of systems ...................... 144 Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 154 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 150 Setting the air distribution ............. 151 Setting the air vents ...................... 161 Setting the airflow ......................... 151 Setting the temperature ................ 150 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 154 Switching on/off ........................... 148 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 155 Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... 153 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 151 THERMOTRONIC (2-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 147 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 30 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Activating/deactivating ................. 256 Display message ............................ 273 Operation/notes .............................. 73 COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 346 Combination switch .......................... 129 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 250 Convenience closing feature ............ 103 Convenience opening feature .......... 102 7 8 Index Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... Temperature gauge ........................ Warning lamp ................................. Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. Cornering lamps Changing bulbs .............................. Cornering light function Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... Cruise control lever ....................... Deactivating ................................... Display message ............................ Driving system ............................... Important safety notes .................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Selecting ........................................ Setting a speed .............................. Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. Rear compartment ......................... 154 338 283 408 262 247 310 27 136 279 130 133 200 200 201 290 199 199 200 200 201 200 326 325 326 D Data see Technical data Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 282 Function/notes ............................. 127 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity ................. 24 Diagnostics connection ...................... 24 Diesel .................................................. 405 Digital speedometer ......................... 251 Dipped-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 135 Display message ............................ 279 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 126 Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. 259 Switching on/off ........................... 127 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 177 Display message Driving systems ............................. 286 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 339 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 265 Engine ............................................ 283 General information ....................... 265 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 265 Key ................................................ 300 Lights ............................................. 279 Safety systems .............................. 266 Tyres .............................................. 292 Vehicle ........................................... 294 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 74 Warning lamp ................................. 312 Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 312 DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions ..................... 206 Cruise control lever ....................... 205 Deactivating ................................... 209 Display message ............................ 289 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 209 Driving tips .................................... 210 Function/notes ............................. 204 Important safety notes .................. 204 Selecting ........................................ 205 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 208 Stopping ........................................ 207 Door Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 260 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 95 Index Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 87 Control panel ................................... 39 Display message ............................ 298 Emergency locking ........................... 96 Emergency unlocking ....................... 95 Important safety notes .................... 93 Opening (from the inside) ................ 93 Drive program Display ........................................... 180 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 178 Manual transmission ...................... 177 Drive programs Automatic transmission ................. 183 Driver's door see Door Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 340 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 126 Driving on flooded roads .................. 198 Driving safety system COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 73 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 80 STEER CONTROL ............................. 80 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 73 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 80 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 76 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 73 Distance warning function ............... 74 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 76 Important safety guidelines ............. 72 Overview .......................................... 72 Driving system Start-off assist ............................... 213 Driving systems Active Parking Assist ..................... 220 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 215 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 230 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 234 Cruise control ................................ 199 Display message ............................ 286 Distronic Plus ................................ 204 HOLD function ............................... 211 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... Lane package ................................ PARKTRONIC ................................. RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... Reversing camera .......................... SPEEDTRONIC ............................... Traffic Sign Assist .......................... Driving tips Aquaplaning ................................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Downhill gradient ........................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. The first 1500 km .......................... Towing a trailer .............................. Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Climate control (air conditioning) .. Climate control (THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 236 234 216 214 225 202 231 198 182 197 210 197 126 198 198 198 196 195 198 197 198 164 373 126 164 239 197 253 174 175 146 148 E EASY-PACK tailgate see Tailgate EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 268 9 10 Index Function/notes ................................ 80 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 196 On-board computer ....................... 250 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 171 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 170 Deactivating/activating ................. 171 General information ....................... 170 Important safety notes .................. 170 Introduction ................................... 170 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ................ 24 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59 Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 95 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 89 Inserting .......................................... 89 Locking vehicle ................................ 96 Removing ......................................... 89 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 95 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 396 Important safety notes .................. 396 Removing ....................................... 397 Technical data ............................... 398 Emergency unlocking Tailgate .......................................... 100 Vehicle ............................................. 95 Engine Display message ............................ 283 ECO start/stop function ................ 170 Engine number ............................... 402 Jump-starting ................................. 360 Running irregularly ......................... 173 Starting (important safety notes) ... 167 Starting problems .......................... 173 Starting the engine with the key .... 168 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 168 Stopping ........................................ 192 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 366 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 310 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 400 Problem (fault) ............................... 173 Engine oil Additives ........................................ 408 Checking the oil level ..................... 336 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 336 Display message ............................ 285 Filling capacity ............................... 407 Notes about oil grades ................... 406 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 336 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 262 Topping up ..................................... 337 Viscosity ........................................ 408 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 22 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 262 Characteristics ................................. 77 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 78 Deactivating/activating (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 77 Deactivating/activating (onboard computer, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 256 Display message ............................ 266 Function/notes ................................ 76 General notes .................................. 76 Important safety guidelines ............. 77 Trailer stabilisation .......................... 79 Warning lamp ................................. 306 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 77 Exhaust see Exhaust pipe Exhaust pipe Cleaning ......................................... 345 Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... 344 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 119 Index Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... Folding in/out (automatically) ....... Folding in/out (electrically) ........... Out of position (troubleshooting) ... Parking position ............................. Resetting ....................................... Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 120 261 120 120 120 121 120 122 F Fault message see Display messages Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... First-aid kit ......................................... Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... Lowering the vehicle ...................... Preparing the vehicle ..................... Raising the vehicle ......................... Removing a wheel .......................... Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ Flat tyre Changing a wheel/fitting the spare wheel ................................... MOExtended tyres ......................... Preparing the vehicle ..................... TIREFIT kit ...................................... see Emergency spare wheel Floormat ............................................. Foglamps Switching on/off ........................... Foglamps (extended range) .............. Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. Two-way radio ................................ Front foglamps Display message ............................ Front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 351 350 383 383 380 381 383 381 379 352 352 353 331 127 131 400 400 281 278 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 52 Problems ......................................... 56 System self-test ............................... 54 Fuel Additives ........................................ 405 Consumption information .............. 406 Consumption statistics .................. 250 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 250 Displaying the range ...................... 250 Driving tips .................................... 196 E10 ................................................ 404 Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Grade (petrol) ................................ 404 Important safety notes .................. 403 Low outside temperatures ............. 406 Notes for CLA 250 ......................... 405 Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles ................................................ 404 Problem (malfunction) ................... 191 Quality (diesel) ............................... 405 Refuelling ....................................... 188 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 403 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 189 Fuel filter (white display message) .. 286 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 250 Gauge .............................................. 32 Fuel reserve see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 403 Problem (malfunction) ................... 191 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 368 Before changing ............................. 367 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 367 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 368 Important safety notes .................. 367 11 12 Index G Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 262 Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 262 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 22 Glove compartment .......................... 317 H Hazard warning lamps Display message ............................ 300 Switching on/off ........................... 129 Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... 115 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 115 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 116 Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 116 Headlamp Cleaning system (function) ............ 129 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 409 Headlamp flasher .............................. 129 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 132 Topping up the cleaning system .... 339 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... 342 Hill start assist .................................. 169 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 212 Deactivating ................................... 212 Display message ............................ 287 Function/notes ............................. 211 Horn ...................................................... 30 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 80 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 309 Indicator and warning lamps COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 312 Coolant .......................................... 310 Engine diagnostics ......................... 310 SPORT handling mode ................... 307 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 280 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 32 Settings ......................................... 258 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 33 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 246 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating ................. 259 Display message ............................ 282 Overview ........................................ 130 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left .. 259 Interior lighting Control ........................................... 133 Emergency lighting ........................ 133 Overview ........................................ 132 Reading lamp ................................. 132 Interior motion sensor Deactivating ..................................... 83 Function ........................................... 82 Priming ............................................ 82 Switching off .................................... 83 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 61 J Jack Storage location ............................ 351 Using ............................................. 381 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 360 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 90 Checking the battery ....................... 90 Convenience closing feature .......... 103 Convenience opening feature ........ 102 Display message ............................ 300 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 87 Emergency key element ................... 89 Important safety notes .................... 86 Index KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 88 Loss ................................................. 91 Modifying the programming ............. 88 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 165 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91 Starting the engine ........................ 168 Key positions Start/Stop button .......................... 165 Key positions (ignition lock) ............ 165 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ...................... 103 Deactivation ..................................... 87 Locking ............................................ 87 Unlocking ......................................... 87 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 182 Manual gearshifting ....................... 187 Kneebag ............................................... 50 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ Display message ............................ Function/information .................... Lane package ..................................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Lashing eyelets ................................. Licence plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light sensor (display message) ....... Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Active light function ....................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Foglamps ....................................... Foglamps (extended range) ........... Hazard warning lamps ................... 257 287 236 234 263 321 281 282 259 130 131 127 130 127 126 127 131 129 Headlamp flasher ........................... 129 Headlamp range ............................ 128 Light switch ................................... 126 Main-beam headlamps ................... 129 Misted up headlamps .................... 132 Motorway mode ............................. 130 Parking lamps ................................ 128 Rear foglamp ................................. 128 Setting exterior lighting ................. 126 Side lamps ..................................... 128 Turn signals ................................... 129 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 200 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 205 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 202 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC Loading guidelines ............................ 316 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 95 Emergency locking ........................... 96 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 94 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 260 Luggage compartment cover Fitting/removing ........................... 322 Important safety notes .................. 321 Notes/function .............................. 321 Luggage compartment enlargement ................................................... 319 Luggage compartment floor Important safety notes .................. 324 opening/closing ............................ 324 stowage well, under ....................... 324 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 116 M M+S tyres ........................................... 372 Main-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 131 13 14 Index Changing bulbs .............................. 136 Display message ............................ 281 Switching on/off ........................... 129 Manual transmission Drive program ................................ 177 DYNAMIC SELECT button .............. 174 Engaging reverse gear ................... 176 Gear lever ...................................... 176 Pulling away ................................... 168 Shift recommendation ................... 176 Shifting to neutral .......................... 176 Starting the engine ........................ 167 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 342 Memory card (audio) ......................... 253 Memory function ............................... 122 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Switch in the overhead control panel .............................................. 329 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 231 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 265 Messages see Display messages Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 344 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... 400 Installation ..................................... 400 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 254 Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 329 Transmission output (maximum) .... 400 Mobile telephone Pre-installed bracket ...................... 331 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 88 MOExtended tyres ............................. 352 Motorway mode ................................ 130 MP3 Operating ....................................... 253 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 249 Permanent display ......................... 258 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 247 Overview .......................................... 34 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 251 Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 164 O Occupant safety Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation .......................... 51 Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59 Children in the vehicle ..................... 59 Important safety notes .................... 43 PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp ................................................. 43 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 72 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 58 Restraint system introduction .......... 42 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 43 Seat belts ........................................ 44 Odometer ........................................... 250 On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 262 Assistance graphic menu ............... 255 Assistance menu ........................... 255 Audio menu ................................... 253 Convenience submenu .................. 261 Display messages .......................... 265 Displaying a service message ........ 340 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 209 Factory settings ............................. 262 Heating submenu ........................... 260 Important safety notes .................. 246 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 258 Light submenu ............................... 259 Menu overview .............................. 249 Message memory .......................... 265 Navigation menu ............................ 251 Index Operating video DVD ..................... 253 Operation ....................................... 247 RACETIMER ................................... 263 Service menu ................................. 257 Settings menu ............................... 258 Standard display ............................ 250 Telephone menu ............................ 254 Trip menu ...................................... 250 Vehicle submenu ........................... 259 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 136 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 23 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 24 Important safety note ...................... 23 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 247 Overhead control panel ...................... 40 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 72 P Paint code .......................................... 402 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 342 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety information ......... 105 Operating ....................................... 106 Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof ......................... 107 Problem (malfunction) ................... 110 Rain-closing feature (when driving) ................................................ 107 Rain-closing feature (when the engine is switched off) ................... 107 Reversing feature ........................... 106 Parking Important safety notes .................. 192 Parking brake ................................ 193 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 121 Reversing camera .......................... 225 see Active Parking Assist see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 220 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 269 Electric parking brake .................... 193 Warning lamp ................................. 309 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 281 Switching on/off ........................... 128 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 219 Driving system ............................... 216 Function/notes ............................. 216 Important safety notes .................. 216 Problem (fault) ............................... 220 Sensor range ................................. 217 Warning display ............................. 218 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 278 Indicator lamps ................................ 43 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 278 Petrol .................................................. 404 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 72 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 346 Power windows see Side windows Pre-Crash Safety System see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 58 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 274 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 81 Immobiliser ...................................... 80 Interior motion sensor ..................... 82 Tow-away protection ........................ 81 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 22 15 16 Index Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. General notes ................................ Hill start assist ............................... Manual transmission ...................... Trailer ............................................ 168 168 169 168 169 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 26 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25 R RACE START important safety notes ................... 214 RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 214 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 263 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 253 see separate operating instructions Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ................ 24 Rain closing feature (panorama sliding sunroof) ................................. 107 Reading lamp ..................................... 132 Rear bench seat Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 320 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 162 Rear foglamp Changing bulbs .............................. 137 Display message ............................ 281 Switching on/off ........................... 128 Rear lamps see Lights Rear seat Adjusting the angle of the backrests ................................................ 320 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 154 Switching on/off ........................... 153 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade .............. 140 Switching on/off ........................... 138 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 48 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 120 Dipping (manual) ........................... 119 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Important safety notes .................. 188 Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles ................................................ 404 Refuelling process ......................... 189 see Fuel Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 157 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 159 Replacing bulbs Important safety notes .................. 133 Overview of bulb types .................. 134 Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 135 Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... 159 Rescue card ......................................... 26 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 286 Warning lamp ................................. 310 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 155 Restraint system Display message ............................ 275 Introduction ..................................... 42 Warning lamp ................................. 309 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Rev counter ........................................ 247 Reverse gear Engaging (manual transmission) .... 176 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 180 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 344 Displays in the Audio display ......... 226 Displays in the COMAND display ... 226 Function/notes ............................. 225 Switching on/off ........................... 226 Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 106 Index Side windows ................................. 101 Tailgate ............................................ 97 Reversing function Roller sunblind ............................... 108 Reversing lamps Display message ............................ 281 Roller sunblind Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 107 Roof carrier ........................................ 324 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 347 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 410 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 59 Safety net Attaching ....................................... 323 Important safety information ......... 323 Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 117 Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 320 Seat belt Correct usage .................................. 46 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 261 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 47 Adjusting the height ......................... 46 Cleaning ......................................... 347 Display message ............................ 274 Fastening ......................................... 46 Important safety guidelines ............. 44 Introduction ..................................... 44 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 48 Releasing ......................................... 47 Warning lamp ................................. 301 Warning lamp (function) ................... 47 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 115 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 114 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 116 Adjusting the head restraint .......... Cleaning the cover ......................... Correct driver's seat position ........ Important safety notes .................. Seat heating problem .................... Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... Switching seat heating on/off ....... Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... Coolant (engine) ............................ Engine oil ....................................... Fuel ................................................ Important safety notes .................. Washer fluid ................................... Setting the air distribution ............... Setting the airflow ............................ Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... On-board computer ....................... SETUP (on-board computer) ............. Shifting to neutral (manual transmission) ............................................. Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... Side windows Convenience closing ...................... Convenience opening .................... Important safety notes .................. Opening/closing ............................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Resetting ....................................... Reversing feature ........................... Sidebag ................................................ Sliding sunroof see Panorama sliding sunroof 115 346 112 113 118 122 117 346 344 257 408 408 406 402 402 409 151 151 262 258 262 176 128 103 102 101 102 105 104 101 50 17 18 Index Snow chains ...................................... 373 Socket Luggage compartment ................... 329 Sockets Centre console .............................. 328 General notes ................................ 328 Rear compartment ......................... 329 Specialist workshop ............................ 25 Spectacles compartment ................. 317 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 258 Digital ............................................ 251 In the Instrument cluster ................. 32 Segments ...................................... 246 Selecting a display unit .................. 258 SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 203 Display message ............................ 290 Function/notes ............................. 202 Important safety notes .................. 202 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 202 Permanent ..................................... 204 Selecting ........................................ 202 Storing the current speed .............. 203 Variable ......................................... 202 SPEEDTRONIC (variable) Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed ..... 203 SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 78 Warning lamp ................................. 307 Start-off assist Activating ....................................... 213 Important safety notes .................. 213 Start/Stop button Removing ....................................... 167 Starting the engine ........................ 168 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 167 STEER CONTROL .................................. 80 Steering Display message ............................ 299 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ...................... 118 Button overview ............................... 34 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 247 Cleaning ......................................... 346 Gearshift paddles ........................... 185 Important safety notes .................. 118 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 185 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 263 Stowage compartment Map pockets .................................. 319 Stowage compartments Armrest (front) ............................... 318 Armrest (under) ............................. 318 Centre console .............................. 317 Centre console (rear) ..................... 319 Cup holder ..................................... 325 Glove compartment ....................... 317 Important safety information ......... 316 Spectacles compartment ............... 317 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 318 Stowage net ....................................... 319 Stowage space Stowage net ................................... 319 Summer tyres .................................... 372 Sun visor ............................................ 327 Suspension Adaptive Damping System ............. 216 Suspension settings AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 215 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ 281 see Lights Tailgate Display message ............................ 297 Emergency unlocking ..................... 100 Important safety notes .................... 96 Limiting the opening angle ............. 100 Obstruction detection ...................... 97 Opening dimensions ...................... 410 Index Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 98 Opening/closing automatically from inside ....................................... 99 Opening/closing automatically from outside .................................... 98 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 402 Emergency spare wheel ................. 398 Information .................................... 400 Trailer loads ................................... 412 Tyres/wheels ................................. 384 Vehicle data ................................... 410 Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 254 Display message ............................ 299 Introduction ................................... 254 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 254 Number from the phone book ........ 255 Redialling ....................................... 255 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 254 Telephone compartment ................ 318 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 247 Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 262 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 262 Outside temperature ...................... 247 Setting (climate control) ................ 150 Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 262 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 199 Through-loading ................................ 319 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 263 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 353 Tyre pressure not reached ............. 355 Tyre pressure reached ................... 355 Top Tether ............................................ 62 Total distance recorder .................... 250 Tow-away protection Activating ......................................... 82 Deactivating ..................................... 82 Function ........................................... 81 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 366 Fitting the towing eye .................... 364 Important safety notes .................. 362 Removing the towing eye ............... 364 Towing Important safety notes .................. 362 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 366 Transporting the vehicle ................ 365 Towing a trailer Active Parking Assist ..................... 220 Axle load, permissible .................... 412 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 79 Failure check for LEDs ................... 242 General notes ................................ 239 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 169 Trailer tow hitch display message .. 298 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 364 Removing the towing eye ............... 364 With both axles on the ground ....... 365 With front axle raised ..................... 364 Towing eye ......................................... 351 Traffic Sign Assist Activating ....................................... 232 Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 256 Display message ............................ 289 Function/notes ............................. 231 Important safety notes .................. 232 Instrument cluster display ............. 232 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer towing 7-pin connector ............................. 242 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 236 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 345 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 241 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 241 Driving tips .................................... 239 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 241 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 240 Important safety notes .................. 237 Lights display message .................. 280 Mounting dimensions .................... 411 Power supply ................................. 242 Trailer loads ................................... 412 Transmission see Automatic transmission 19 20 Index see Manual transmission Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... Transporting the vehicle .................. Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. Trip meter Calling up ....................................... Resetting (on-board computer) ...... Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................... Changing bulbs (rear) .................... Switching on/off ........................... Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Information on driving .................... M+S tyres ...................................... MOExtended tyres ......................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Summer tyres ................................ Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... Wheel and tyre combinations ........ see Flat tyre 178 365 346 250 250 251 136 137 129 400 400 400 376 292 355 355 374 375 375 376 377 376 376 376 379 378 313 378 379 371 380 292 384 370 370 372 372 379 371 380 372 384 371 386 U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 95 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 94 Upshift indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 262 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 327 Variable SPEEDTRONIC see SPEEDTRONIC Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 25 Data acquisition ............................... 26 Display message ............................ 294 Electronics ..................................... 400 Equipment ....................................... 23 Implied warranty .............................. 25 Individual settings .......................... 258 Leaving parked up ......................... 195 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 96 Locking (key) ................................... 87 Lowering ........................................ 383 Pulling away ................................... 168 Raising ........................................... 381 Registration ..................................... 25 Securing from rolling away ............ 381 Transporting .................................. 365 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 95 Unlocking (key) ................................ 87 Vehicle data ................................... 410 Vehicle data Boot load (maximum) ..................... 410 Index Roof load (maximum) ..................... 410 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 410 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 96 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 402 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 351 Ventilation Setting the vents ........................... 161 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 253 VIN Seat ............................................... 402 Type plate ...................................... 402 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 304 Brakes ........................................... 303 Distance warning signal ................. 312 ESP® .............................................. 306 ESP® OFF ....................................... 307 Fuel tank ........................................ 310 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 200 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 205 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 202 Overview .......................................... 33 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 43 Reserve fuel ................................... 310 Seat belt ........................................ 301 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 313 Warning triangle ................................ 350 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 299 Wheel and tyre combinations Tyres .............................................. 386 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 383 Wheel chock ...................................... 381 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 379 Changing/replacing ....................... 379 Checking ........................................ 371 Cleaning ......................................... 343 Emergency spare wheel ................. 396 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 383 General notes ................................ 384 Important safety notes .................. 370 Information on driving .................... 370 Removing a wheel .......................... 383 Storing ........................................... 380 Tightening torque ........................... 383 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 384 Windowbag Display message ............................ 276 Operation ......................................... 51 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 343 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 152 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Important safety notes .................. 409 Topping up ..................................... 339 Windscreen wipers Display message ............................ 300 Problem (malfunction) ................... 142 Rear window wiper ........................ 138 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 138 Switching on/off ........................... 137 Winter driving General notes ................................ 372 Winter operation Slippery road surfaces ................... 198 Snow chains .................................. 373 Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. 259 M+S tyres ...................................... 372 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 344 Important safety notes .................. 138 Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 140 Replacing (windscreen) .................. 139 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 346 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 151 21 22 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants available. You can return your vehicle to these plants free of charge. This makes a valuable contribution to the recycling process and the conservation of resources. For further information on recycling old vehicles, recovery and the terms of the policy, visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Ravoid Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Rdoor Introduction Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by MercedesBenz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 402) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become Z 23 24 Introduction trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb or a pothole in the road heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed for. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon con- tinuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Ra Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a Introduction depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle registration vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual vehicle technical data Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain Z 25 26 Introduction QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains, in a compact form, the most important information about your vehicle, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html. This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- dent Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair Data stored in the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature services processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more information there, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, after consultation with an authorised expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Rservice Raccident reports to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. Rdamage Introduction Copyright information General notes Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource Z 27 28 29 Cockpit ................................................. 30 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 34 Centre console .................................... 36 Door control panel .............................. 39 Overhead control panel ...................... 40 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 32 30 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 185 ; Combination switch 129 = Instrument cluster 32 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 177 B PARKTRONIC warning display C Overhead control panel Function Page D Climate control systems 144 E Ignition lock 165 F Adjusts the steering wheel 118 G Cruise control lever 200 H Electric parking brake 193 I Light switch 126 216 J Diagnostics connection 40 K Opens the bonnet 24 335 31 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 216 = Combination switch 129 ? Instrument cluster 32 A Horn B DIRECT SELECT lever 177 C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 185 40 Function Page D Light switch 126 E Electric parking brake 193 F Opens the bonnet 335 G Diagnostics connection H Ignition lock 165 I Adjusts the steering wheel 118 J Cruise control lever 200 K Climate control systems 144 24 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Displays and controls i Instrument cluster with speedometer (km/h) Function : Page Speedometer Speedometer segments 246 ; Multifunction display 249 = Rev counter 247 i Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 247). Function ? Coolant temperature A Fuel gauge Fuel filler flap location indicator æ: the fuel filler cap is on the left. B Instrument cluster lighting Page 247 246 Instrument cluster 33 At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page : L Dipped-beam headlamps 127 ; T Side lamps 128 = K Main-beam headlamps 129 ? ÷ ESP® 306 A ! Electric parking brake (red) 309 B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) C Function G % Diesel engine: preglow M SPORT handling mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Page 168 307 H ? Coolant 310 I R Rear foglamp 128 J N Foglamp 127 K ; Engine diagnostics 310 309 L h Tyre pressure monitor 313 · Distance warning 312 M æ Reserve fuel 310 D #! Turn signals 129 N å ESP® OFF 306 E 6 Restraint system 43 O ! ABS 304 F ü Seat belt 301 P J Brakes 303 34 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio 20 or COMAND Online display (see the separate operating instructions) Page 249 Function = ? Vehicles with Audio 20: switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) Vehicles with COMAND Online: switches on LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions) 8 Mute WX Adjusts the volume ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits the telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory Page 254 Multifunction steering wheel ? =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms the selection Hides display messages % Back Vehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control of the navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) Vehicles with COMAND Online: switches off LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions) Page 247 247 247 265 247 At a glance Function 35 36 Centre console At a glance Centre console Centre console, upper section Function Page : Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions ; c Seat heating Mercedes-AMG vehicles: AMG RIDE CONTROL (left side) Mercedes-AMG vehicles: adjusts the exhaust flap of the AMG performance exhaust system (right side) 117 c PARKTRONIC 216 = 215 172 Function Page ? è ECO start/stop function 170 A £ Hazard warning lamps 129 B PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp C DYNAMIC SELECT button å Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® 174 & Auxiliary heating 156 D 43 78 Centre console 37 At a glance Centre console, lower section i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever Function : ; Function Page Page = Cup holders 325 Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Stowage compartment 327 328 328 316 ? Stowage compartment with Media Interface 316 A Stowage compartment 316 Audio/COMAND controller (see the separate operating instructions) Centre console At a glance 38 i Mercedes-AMG vehicles Function : Function Page Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Stowage compartment 327 328 328 316 ; Selector lever 180 = Manual gearshifting (permanent setting) 185 Page ? DYNAMIC SELECT controller 175 A Cup holders 325 B Stowage compartment with Media Interface 316 C Audio/COMAND controller (see the separate operating instructions) Door control panel 39 At a glance Door control panel Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 93 B ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle W Opens/closes the side windows 94 C = r45= Saves the seat and exterior mirror settings 122 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 72 ? Adjusts the seats electrically 115 q Opens the luggage compartment 99 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 119 D 102 40 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 132 ; p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 132 = | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off 132 ? ë Primes/deactivates tow-away protection 81 A Rear-view mirror B ê Primes/deactivates the interior motion sensor 119 82 Function C Page G SOS button (Mercedes-Benz emergency call system) 329 D Spectacles compartment 317 E 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof with roller sunblinds 106 F c Switches the front interior lighting on 132 G p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 132 41 Useful information .............................. 42 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Occupant safety .................................. 42 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 72 Driving safety systems ....................... 72 Protection against theft ..................... 80 Safety Children in the vehicle ........................ 59 Occupant safety 42 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Safety els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system RAirbags RChild Panic alarm restraint system seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if all vehicle occupants always: RChild Rfasten To activate: press and hold the ! button : for approx. one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed. X To deactivate: press the ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO X Press the Start/Stop button. The key must be in the vehicle. X The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. their seat belts correctly (Y page 46) Radjust their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 113). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 112). You also have to make sure that an airbag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48). An airbag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if the protection of the seat belt is sufficient in an accident, the airbags are not deployed. In the event of an accident, only the airbags that increase protection in the relevant accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on the restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of belt tensioners and airbags" (Y page 57). For more information about children travelling with you in the vehicle, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). Important safety notes G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for example. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for details. Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the automatic deactivation system of the front-passenger front airbag. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Z 43 Safety Occupant safety 44 Occupant safety Safety Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a rearward-facing child restraint system: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). RChildren in a forward-facing child restraint system: depending on the installed child restraint system and the age and size of the child, the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. Therefore, it is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front-passenger front airbag is enabled. Depending on the build of the person on the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may light up. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger seat should not be used. It is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 51) as well as on "Seat belts" (Y page 44) and "Airbags" (Y page 48). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction A correctly worn seat belt is the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of a collision or if the vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. The seat belt also helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the best position in relation to the airbag being deployed. The seat belt system consists of: Rseat belts tensioners for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Rbelt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply from the belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in the event of a collision so that it fits tightly across your body. However, it does not pull the vehicle occupants back in the direction of the seat backrest. The belt tensioner does not, however, correct an incorrect seat position or correct the routing of a seat belt that is worn incorrectly. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. Rbelt ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident and would have to be replaced. Important safety notes G WARNING The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always make sure that all vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belt properly and are seated correctly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without a suitable, additional restraint system. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 51) Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" in this Owner's Manual (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or fail to be deployed when required. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify safety belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. Otherwise, your vehicle's general operating permit could be invalidated. Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you fit another multipoint seat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection. G WARNING If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an Z 45 Safety Occupant safety 46 Occupant safety Safety accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Only use the standard three-point seat belt. Never modify the seat belt system. Correct seat belt use Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants Also ensure that no objects are placed between a person and the seat. e.g. a cushion. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 316). Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted into the Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Rthe Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt (Y page 46). belt buckle belonging to that seat seat belt is tight across your body Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted Only then can forces which occur be distributed across the surface of the seat belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the centre of your shoulder The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm. If possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes across your lap as tightly and as low down as possible The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and never across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, press the lap belt down into your hip joints and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt Basic illustration Adjust the seat (Y page 112). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet =. X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened X Occupant safety The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the centre of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt outlet release ? and slide belt outlet downwards. X Let go of belt outlet release ? in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages. X Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Safety automatically; see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. 47 Basic illustration X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards belt outlet =. Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 261). Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts. It may Z Safety 48 Occupant safety light up continuously or flash. A warning tone may also sound. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone stops as soon as the driver's and the co-driver's seat belts have been fastened. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 301). Rear seat belt status indicator An airbag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. It is not a replacement for the seat belt. The airbag offers additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other (Y page 57). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to completely rule out a risk of injury caused by an airbag due to the speed at which the airbag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING The seat belts on the left and centre rear seats, when viewed in the direction of travel, are not fastened. (Example) The rear seat belt status indicator is only available for certain countries. For approximately 30 seconds, the rear seat belt status indicator informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened. The rear seat belt status indicator appears if: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and you pull away again You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 265). Airbags Introduction The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the airbags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The centre of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against Occupant safety RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. ROnly secure a child to the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front airbag is disabled, and only then in a rearwardfacing child restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled (Y page 43). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front airbags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Z Safety the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: 49 Occupant safety Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's kneebag is triggered together with the front airbags. The driver's kneebag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat. Safety 50 i The driver's kneebag is only available in certain countries. Sidebags Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. When deployed, the front airbags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the frontpassenger front airbag (Y page 43). The front-passenger front airbag will only deploy if: Rthe automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has detected that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 51). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit (Y page 52) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent the deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz. Driver's kneebag Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the sidebag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms Occupant safety Ran occupant is detected on the frontpassenger seat or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Windowbags Windowbags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the windowbag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the windowbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a windowbag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 57). Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Introduction In order to recognise a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system categorises the person in the frontpassenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front airbag is either enabled or disabled. If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted to the frontpassenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up after the system self-test and remain lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. The system does not disable: Rthe sidebag windowbag Rthe seat belt tensioner Make sure that your vehicle is equipped with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 63). If this is not the case, always install a child restraint system on a suitable rear seat (Y page 65). If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then is the correct function of the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system guaranteed. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 65) in addition to the child Rthe Z Safety In the event of a side impact, the sidebag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger airbag deactivation system: the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: 51 Occupant safety 52 restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Safety Operation of automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front airbag both before and during the journey. If a person sits in the passenger seat, they must be: Rseated with the seat belt fastened correctly Rin : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front airbag is disabled or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out a self-diagnosis. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag: RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an airbag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 278). When the frontpassenger seat is occupied, always pay atten- an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system may be influenced, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion The front-passenger front airbag may be disabled by mistake as a result of these or similar actions. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up permanently. The front-passenger front airbag does not then deploy during an accident. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always make sure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and that the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front airbag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co-driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Further information can be found under "Problems with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 56). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system detects that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system selftest and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. But in the case of a child in a rearwardfacing child restraint, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp can light up after the system self-test and remain lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's build. It is recommended that you fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a forward-facing child restraint system, either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's build. Z 53 Safety Occupant safety Safety 54 Occupant safety Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 63) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 65). Alternatively, you can fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person with a small build can sit on a rear seat. - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person with a smaller build should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a build corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a MercedesBenz Service Centre. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front airbag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Occupant safety When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: 55 front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 56). Rthe classification of the person in the front- Safety passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. This could result in the front-passenger front airbag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardsfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the rear reclining seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp then shows the status of the co-driver's front airbag (Y page 52). Further information can be obtained under "Problems with the automatic co-driver's Z 56 Occupant safety Problems with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54). Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is BAG OFF indicator false. lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the perremains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 52). though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the passenger seat is occufront-passenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation person with a build corsystem checked as soon as possible at a Mercedes-Benz Serresponding to that of an vice Centre. adult. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: The automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child restraint system. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. Rempty X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the Roccupied with a rearseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the frontward-facing child passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and restraint system the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/ or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. It is recommended that you fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked as soon as possible at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Occupant safety Important safety notes G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause shortterm breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the seat belt tensioners in the event of a head-on or rear collision. A seat belt tensioner can only be triggered if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 43) Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat The seat belt tensioners in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a high severity accident, in certain head-on collisions, additional components of the restraint system are deployed independently of each other: Rfront airbags and driver's kneebag Rwindowbag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt On vehicles with the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system: depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. The frontpassenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 43). Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is Z Safety Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags 57 Safety 58 Occupant safety filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if the second deployment stage is activated within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold for the seat belt tensioners and airbags is determined based on the evaluation of the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment process should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other. RSidebags on the side on which an impact occurs, independent from the seat belt tensioner and seat belt usage Vehicles with the automatic frontpassenger airbag deactivation system: the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: - an occupant is detected on the frontpassenger seat or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindowbag on the side on which an impact occurs, independent of seat belt usage and regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied RSeat belt tensioners, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection for the vehicle occupants in this situation i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal Rside collision impact PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Introduction In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Although your vehicle is equipped with PRESAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a Children in the vehicle Automatic measures after an accident PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Immediately after an accident, the following measures may be implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when Rthe Function BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Ron vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: if adaptive Brake Assist intervenes powerfully PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. the vehicle skids, the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. Rvehicles with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: Rif X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). hazard warning lamps are activated emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system: automatic emergency call Rthe Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Ralways pay attention to the instructions and safety notes on the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 51). Z Safety safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. 59 60 Children in the vehicle Safety G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt (Y page 46). Child restraint system If you fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the centre rear seat, the rear arm rest must be folded back as far as possible. Observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 65). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system recommended by Mercedes-Benz (Y page 69). G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 316). The securing systems of child restraint systems are: seat belt system ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 63). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. 61 poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Safety G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. Children in the vehicle When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 65). Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX securing rings. Rthe Rthe i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. This symbol indicates an ISOFIX position which is suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system. A similar symbol can be found on the ISOFIX child restraint system. ISOFIX and i-Size child restraint systems G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protection for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg, who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This This symbol indicates an i‑Size position which is suitable for attaching an i-Size child restraint system. A similar symbol can be found on the i-Size child restraint system. Z Children in the vehicle 62 ! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged. rings. ISOFIX securing ring : or i-Size securing ring ; are installed on the left and right sides of the rear seats. Safety Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is fitted with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. : ISOFIX securing rings Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings : or i-Size securing rings ;. G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. Install the i-Size child restraint system on both i-Size securing rings ;. If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock verification indicator will be visible (Y page 319). ; i-Size securing rings X or X Important safety notes ISOFIX and i-Size are standardised securing systems for special child restraint systems. ISOFIX child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R-44. i-Size child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R-129. Only child restraint systems that have been approved in accordance with ECE R-44 may be attached to ISOFIX securing rings. i-Size child restraint systems that have been approved in accordance with ECE R-44 and ECE R-129 may be attached to i-Size securing Top Tether anchorages restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. Ensure that: RTop The Top Tether anchorage points are located on the rear side of the backrests on both outer rear seats. Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted RTop Tether belt ? is routed between the rear seat backrest and the luggage compartment cover if the luggage compartment cover is fitted X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: X If necessary, move head restraint : back down again slightly (Y page 116). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ?. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: X X Move head restraint : upwards. Route Top Tether belt ? under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route Top Tether belt ? centrally over head restraint :. or X Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route one Top Tether belt ? to the left and one to the right past the side of head restraint :. General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on the "Automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 51). All vehicles: X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child Z 63 Safety Children in the vehicle 64 Children in the vehicle You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Safety Ra child restraint system that is not detected Vehicles without the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system by the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Rthe unintentional disabling of the frontpassenger front airbag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Please observe the warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor, see the illustration. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co-driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 43). If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is not equipped with the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up briefly. However, they have no function and do not indicate that there is an automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. Always fit the rearward-facing restraint system to a suitable rear seat in this case (Y page 65). Observe the following information under "Rearward-facing child restraint system" and "Forward-facing child restraint system" as well as information on the suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 65). Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (Y page 43)is the front-passenger front airbag disabled. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 65) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a forwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 65) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Introduction Only child restraint systems approved in accordance with the ECE standards ECE R44 or ECE R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) are permitted for use in the vehicle. For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area of use is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint system is not possible due to possible contact with the roof. "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal" or an "i-Size" label. Example: approval labels on the child restraint system ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems of the “Universal“ category can be used on seats labelled U, UF, IUF or i-U in accordance with the following tables: RSuitability of the seats for attaching beltsecured child restraint systems RSuitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems RSuitability of the seats for attaching an iSize child restraint system. Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehiZ 65 Safety Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle Safety 66 cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat – if it is absolutely necessary to secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: Always pay attention to the instructions under "Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 63). There you will find instructions on how to correctly route the shoulder belt strap from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system (Y page 65). X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, you must also move the front-passenger seat to the highest position. X Move the backrest to an almost vertical position. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X If possible, move the seat cushion angle to the highest, most vertical position (Y page 114). X Installing a child restraint system on a rear seat X Move the backrest of the rear seat to an almost vertical position (Y page 320). Children in the vehicle 67 If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restraint of the respective seat (Y page 116), if possible. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 60) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system you must replace the head restraints again immediately (Y page 115). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. Legend for the table: X U Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category. Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint systems" table (Y page 69). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight category Front-passenger seat Rear seat Frontpassenger front airbag enabled Frontpassenger front airbag deactivated1 Left, right Centre2 0 up to 10 kg X U, L U, L U, L 0+ up to 13 kg X U, L U, L U, L I 9 kg to 18 kg UF, L U, L U, L U, L II 15 kg to 25 kg U, L U, L U, L X III 22 kg to 36 kg U, L U, L U, L X The vehicle is equipped with an automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 2 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. 1 Z Safety Suitability of the seats for attaching a belt-secured child restraint system Children in the vehicle 68 Safety Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restraint of the respective seat (Y page 116), if possible. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 60) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system you must replace the head restraints again immediately (Y page 115). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. Legend for the table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "Universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint systems" table (Y page 69). The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Weight category Carry-cot Equipment Rear seat left, right F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X 0 up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 IL 0+ up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL3 D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL3 B ISO/F2 IUF I 3 Size category 9 kg to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years If you are using a child restraint system of size category C (ISO/R3), make sure that the front seat backrest does not rest against the child restraint system. Weight category Size category Equipment Rear seat left, right B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Suitability of the seats for attaching an i-Size child restraint system If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restraint of the respective seat (Y page 116), if possible. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 60) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system you must replace the head restraints again immediately (Y page 115). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. Legend for the table: X Seat which is unsuitable for i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. i‑U Suitable for a forward or rearward-facing i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. Seat i‑Size child restraint systems Frontpassenger seat Rear seat Left Centre Right X i‑U X i‑U Recommended child restraint systems General notes Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 63) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 65). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z 69 Safety Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle 70 Safety Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt Weight category Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...)4 Category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 Category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 Group I: 9 kg to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years Britax Römer DUO plus 03 301133 04 301133 970 16 00 Group II/III: 15 kg to 36 kg between approximately 4and 12 years Britax Römer KIDFIX5 04 301198 970 19 00 Recommended "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems 4 5 Weight cat- Size egory category Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number4 Category E 0+: up to 13 kg Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 03 301146 04 301146 B6 6 86 8224 Category I: 9 kg to 18 kg Britax Römer DUO plus 03 301133 04 301133 A 000 970 16 00 B1 Colour code 9H95. Before fitting the KIDFIX child restraint system in the vehicle, always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. These will also include notes on fixing options. Children in the vehicle Important safety notes G WARNING If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: Rthe Rthe leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Child-proof locks for the rear doors rear doors (Y page 71) rear side windows (Y page 72) G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Z Safety Child-proof locks 71 Driving safety systems 72 Override feature for the rear side windows Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview Safety In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS X To enable/disable: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 73) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 73) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 73) RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 76) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 76) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 80) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 80) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 80) Important safety notes Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. They could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal transport box. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. (Y page 370). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. Driving safety systems General notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 304) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 266). The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions; this serves as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist) General notes BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Brakes General notes If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. tion (Y page 72). COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimise the risk of a collision Z Safety ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 73 Safety 74 Driving safety systems with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Adaptive Brake Assist assists you. Important safety notes Detection of hazardous situations can be particularly impaired by: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the important safety notes in the "Running-in notes" section (Y page 164). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rsnow Activating/deactivating The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is automatically active after switching on the ignition. You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer (Y page 256). When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. Distance warning function General notes The distance warning function can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 72). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone. Rnot Function The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds: Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: Rof approximately 30 km/h or more, if, over R7 several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rof approximately 7 km/h or more, if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident - 105 km/h for moving objects - 50 km/h for stationary objects Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R7 R7 - 200 km/h for moving objects - 50 km/h for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking function to intervene. If the autonomous braking function demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 58). R7 Adaptive Brake Assist General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, Adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 7 km/h. It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 250 km/h, Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Z 75 Safety Driving safety systems Safety 76 Driving safety systems Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. If Adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 58). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 72). G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. Adaptive brake lights The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation: Rby flashing brake lamps hazard warning lamps are activated If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 129). Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Characteristics of ESP® i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- General notes If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. tion (Y page 72). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is a component of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing away your vehicle with the front axle raised, please observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 364). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 306) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 266). If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes You can select between the following statuses of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated is deactivated G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Z 77 Safety Driving safety systems 78 Driving safety systems It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations You can select between the following statuses of ESP®: Rin Safety Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer (Y page 256). ESP® deactivated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ESP® activated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RTraction control is still activated RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly REngine RESP® is activated handling mode is activated ® RESP is deactivated ESP® is activated every time the engine is switched on, regardless of whether ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will Driving safety systems Deactivating/activating ESP® When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree RTraction control is still activated REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. X Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RTraction control is still activated RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly REngine ESP® trailer stabilisation General notes If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised. Z Safety otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. 79 80 Protection against theft Important safety notes Safety G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/ trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of approximately 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General notes ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 211) and hill start assist (Y page 169). STEER CONTROL General notes STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering support is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle starts to skid Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: Important safety notes Rthe i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 304) as well as display messages (Y page 268). RESP® is malfunctioning steering is faulty If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. Protection against theft Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. Protection against theft When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobiliser is always deactivated X or Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is deactivated. X X when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) To switch the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is deactivated. To deactivate the alarm using KEYLESSGO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is deactivated. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is deactivated. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. i If the alarm stays on for more than To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe tailgate Rthe bonnet Rthe 30 seconds, the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Assistance Centre. This is done by means of a text message or a data connection. The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system Rthe Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system has been activated properly Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur Z Safety To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X 81 Protection against theft 82 if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Safety Activating Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe tailgate is closed Only then is tow-away protection primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 60 seconds. X Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection if you lock your vehicle and it: Ra Ris being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Ris Switching off X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Deactivating Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Activating Make sure that: side windows are closed Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthe tailgate is closed Only then is the interior motion sensor primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Rthe X Remove the key from the ignition lock. or Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. X Protection against theft X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button. The key must be in the vehicle. The interior motion sensor is automatically switched off. Deactivating X To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle Rthe panorama sliding sunroof remains open Rthe side windows remain open i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a double-lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key (Y page 93). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 93). Remove the key from the ignition lock. or Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes several times in rapid succession. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. X The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again Ra Z Safety Switching off 83 84 85 Useful information .............................. 86 Key ........................................................ 86 Doors .................................................... 93 Luggage compartment ....................... 96 Side windows .................................... 101 Opening and closing Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 105 86 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Key Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the key in the luggage compartment. Otherwise, the key may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 83). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 71). The antitheft alarm system is triggered if the door is Key G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. Key functions You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated or deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 260). X To open the tailgate automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold button F until the tailgate opens (Y page 98). Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: X To close the tailgate automatically from outside the vehicle: if the key is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F button on the key (Y page 98). When the tailgate closes you can then release the button. KEYLESS-GO General notes : & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens the tailgate = % Unlocks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle locks again against theft is reactivated Rprotection X To lock: press the & button. The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. When the locator lighting is activated in Audio 20/COMAND Online, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control (see separate operating instructions). Rthe Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in the vehicle. Locking and unlocking You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you need to carry the key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the key. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhilst driving Z Opening and closing opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 81). 87 Key 88 the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Opening and closing Rwhen To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. For further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 103). X the purposes of activation or deactivation, the vehicle does not have to be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the key twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the key flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 90). X To activate: press any button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. KEYLESS-GO start function General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in the vehicle. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 90). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: X X To unlock the tailgate: pull tailgate handle :. Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use the vehicle for an extended period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-GO. The key will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The key now functions as follows: To unlock: press the % button once. To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X X Key To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 90). Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 81). There are several ways to deactivate the alarm: X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock. Removing the emergency key element Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and, at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. Further information about: X Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 95) the luggage compartment (Y page 100) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 96) Runlocking Inserting the emergency key element X Push emergency key element ; completely into the key until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Z Opening and closing The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: 89 Key 90 Opening and closing H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Replace the battery (Y page 90). i If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 89). Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert emergency key element into the key (Y page 89). X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Key 91 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work: X Check the key battery (Y page 90) and replace it if necessary (Y page 90). X Lock (Y page 95) or unlock (Y page 96) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X If this does not work: X Lock (Y page 95) or unlock (Y page 96) the vehicle using the emergency key element. The key is faulty. X Lock (Y page 95) or unlock (Y page 96) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the key battery (Y page 90) and replace it if necessary using KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 90). If this does not work: X Lock (Y page 95) or unlock (Y page 96) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Lock (Y page 95) or unlock (Y page 96) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Z Opening and closing Problems with the key 92 Key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Opening and closing X If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Lock (Y page 95) or unlock (Y page 96) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using the key. the on-board voltage is too low X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 359). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 360). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked. started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. Stop button. The key is in the vehicle. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the key battery (Y page 90) and replace it if necessary (Y page 90). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. X Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have lost a key. X 93 Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. Stow luggage or loads preferably in the luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 316). United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 83). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 71). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 81). Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door to close. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window is raised again. Z Opening and closing X Doors 94 Opening and closing outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 71). The antitheft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 81). Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. For all countries except the United Kingdom: You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 71). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 81). United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 83). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. To unlock: press button :. X To lock: press button ;. If all the doors and the tailgate are closed, the vehicle locks. X This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. For all countries except the United Kingdom: You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 81). You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the childproof locks (Y page 71). Doors When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: Automatic locking feature Rlocked Rlocked with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked. To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed vehicle is being towed Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer You can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking function using the on-board computer (Y page 260). Rthe Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 81). Z Opening and closing with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked. Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 83). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 71). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 81). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: 95 Luggage compartment Opening and closing 96 X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 89). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 89). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position 1. On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. The door is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 89). Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 89). X Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the tailgate. X Press the locking button on the driver’s door (Y page 94). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press the locking knobs down by hand if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X X i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not primed. Luggage compartment Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Luggage compartment Rpress the F button on the key. Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the close button or STOP button on the tailgate. Rpull the handle on the tailgate. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 410). Stow luggage or loads preferably in the luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 316). Do not leave the key in the luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The tailgate can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside with EASY-PACK tailgate: opened/closed automatically from the outside Rvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: opened/closed automatically from the inside Rvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: closed with the remote operating switch on the key Remergency release activated from the inside Rvehicles Tailgate obstruction detection with reversing function On vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate, the tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automatically opening or closing, the tailgate is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped during the closing process, the tailgate automatically opens again slightly. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 8 mm of the closing path This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Z Opening and closing Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: 97 Luggage compartment 98 If someone is trapped: Rpress the F button on the key or or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing button/STOP button in the tailgate or Rpull the handle on the tailgate Opening and closing Rpull Opening and closing manually Opening Opening/closing automatically from the outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the key. or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the close button or STOP button on the tailgate. Rpull the handle on the tailgate. Rpull Press the % button on the key. X Pull handle :. X Raise the tailgate. X Closing ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 410). Opening automatically Pull the tailgate down using handle :. Let the tailgate to drop into the lock. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO. X X You can open the tailgate automatically with the key or the handle in the tailgate. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the tailgate opens. or X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle and let it go again immediately. Luggage compartment Closing automatically or Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: you can also close the tailgate automatically from outside the vehicle. X 99 Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Important safety notes Example: vehicles with KEYLESS-GO X To close: press button : on the tailgate. or X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: if the key is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F button on the key. You can release the button as soon as the tailgate starts to close. Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door is closed you can simultaneously close the tailgate and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X To close the tailgate and lock the vehicle: press locking button ; on the tailgate. If KEYLESS-GO detects a key outside the vehicle within the rear detection range, the tailgate closes. The vehicle is locked. X To stop the closing process: press button : on the tailgate again. or X Pull the handle in the tailgate. or X Press the F button on the key until the tailgate stops. G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the key or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate Rpull the handle on the tailgate Rpull ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 410). Opening and closing automatically You can open the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. It is only possible to close the tailgate from the driver's seat on vehicles with the EASYPACK tailgate. Z Opening and closing Opening and closing automatically from the inside Luggage compartment 100 Rpress the closing button in the tailgate, or Opening and closing Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again or Rpress the tailgate button on the key. X To store the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until two short tones sound. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate then stops in the stored position when opened. To open: pull remote operating switch for the tailgate : until the tailgate opens. X To close: turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press and hold the remote operating switch for tailgate : until the tailgate is completely closed. X Deactivating X Press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. Emergency release General notes Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate General notes ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside. You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This could be useful, for example, if there is insufficient space above the tailgate. It is possible to limit the tailgate in the top half of its opening range. To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. This does not delete the stored position. Priming To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate. X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: X ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 410). If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the key, or the remote operating switch in the door control panel: Use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. You can reach the emergency release via the luggage compartment. Rusing Side windows Opening 101 becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. Remove the luggage compartment cover (Y page 322). X Fold rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 320). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 89). X Insert emergency key element ; into opening : in the trim and push it in. X Open the tailgate. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 89). If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. X Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from travelling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Z Opening and closing G WARNING Side windows 102 active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Opening and closing Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 72). Convenience opening feature Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESSGO start function, Exclusive Package or AMG Exclusive Package: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. The key can also be used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked. X Vehicles with Exclusive Package or AMG Exclusive Package but without KEYLESS-GO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for the following operations, point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: the key must be in close proximity to the vehicle. Ropen : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. X To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling again. X i You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the panorama sunroof are in the desired position. If the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first. X Press and hold the % button once more until the panorama sliding sunroof reaches the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESSGO start function, Exclusive Package or AMG Exclusive Package: at the same time you can: Rlock the vehicle the side windows Rclose the panorama sliding sunroof On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, you can then close the roller sunblind. Rclose Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof closes. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the key and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 1 m. i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side windows (Y page 101) panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 106) Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 108) Rthe Using the key Vehicles with Exclusive Package or AMG Exclusive Package but without KEYLESS-GO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for the following operations, point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: the key must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows are closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof closes. Z Opening and closing Convenience closing feature 103 Side windows 104 X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Opening and closing Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 102). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 102). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Panorama sliding sunroof 105 Problems with the side windows If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Panorama sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. the switch immediately, or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Z Opening and closing G WARNING Opening and closing 106 Panorama sliding sunroof G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process The closing process is stopped. ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. Operating the panorama sliding sunroof Opening and closing i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Reversing function of the sliding sunroof In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is, however, only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Rwhile resetting : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama sliding sunroof can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling again. After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. Panorama sliding sunroof Rain-closing feature when the engine is switched off The rain-closing feature is only available for vehicles with a rain sensor. When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The panorama sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor. If, for example, the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport, the field of the sensor may be covered. Rit Rain-closing feature when driving The raised panorama sliding sunroof automatically lowers when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe road speed and intensity of the rain You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any direction. To raise the panorama sliding sunroof again, press the 3 button in direction :. The rain-closing feature remains activated. Rthe Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama sliding sunroof Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process The opening/closing process is stopped. Z Opening and closing If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can also temporarily deactivate automatic lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The sliding sunroof raises again automatically. You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof carrier is fitted. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof. If contact is made with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers slightly but remains raised at the rear. 107 108 Panorama sliding sunroof The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be opened and closed when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. Opening and closing Opening and closing Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblind is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is, however, only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the roller sunblind. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man- ually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. : To open ; To open = To close Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. X If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling again. After opening the panorama sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind Reset the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind if the panorama sliding sunroof Panorama sliding sunroof Opening and closing or the roller sunblind does not move smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the roller sunblind is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind can be fully opened and closed again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. 109 Z 110 Panorama sliding sunroof Problems with the panorama sliding sunroof Opening and closing G WARNING If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the reversing function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The panorama sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. The panorama sliding sunroof is closed with more force. If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. The panorama sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature. 111 Useful information ............................ 112 Correct driver's seat position .......... 112 Seats .................................................. 113 Steering wheel .................................. 118 Mirrors ............................................... 119 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function ............................... 122 112 Correct driver's seat position Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety notes on seat adjustment (Y page 113). X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjusted. Manual seat adjustment (Y page 114) Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 115) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted correctly (Y page 115). When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. X Observe the safety notes on steering column adjustment (Y page 118). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted correctly. Adjusts the steering wheel (Y page 118) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 44). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 46). Ryou Seats Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed across your hips in the pelvic area X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 119) so that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat and exterior mirror settings (Y page 122). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 59). G WARNING If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it could unexpectedly move while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always ensure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat belt should: 113 Seats 114 The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Seat height: X Pull handle ; upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Vehicles with the seating comfort package i Further related subjects: RLuggage compartment enlargement (folding down the rear seats) (Y page 319) Adjusting the seats manually Vehicles without the seating comfort package Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever : again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X Backrest angle: X X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards. Seat height: X Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release lever : again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X Backrest angle: Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. X Pull handle ? upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seat cushion angle: Adjust the angle so that your thighs have gentle support. X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. X Seat cushion length: Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. X Release lever ; again. The seat cushion engages. X Seats Adjusting the seats electrically 115 Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. General notes Adjusting the head restraints manually : ; = ? Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Backrest angle Adjusting the head restraint height i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 122). Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-aft position G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust the front head restraints or the outer rear head restraints. Seats 116 This function allows you to adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the head. To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. There are a number of detents. X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head restraint backwards. X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards in order to remove the head restraint (Y page 320). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. X Removing and fitting the rear seat head restraints The rear head restraints on the outer seats can be removed and refitted. For vehicles with sports seats the rear head restraints cannot be removed and refitted. : ; = ? Raises the backrest contour Softens the backrest contour Lowers the backrest contour Hardens the backrest contour Seats 117 AMG Performance Seat Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cushion To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion narrower: press button :. X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion wider: press button ;. X Adjusting the seat backrest side bolsters To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest narrower: press button =. X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest wider: press button ?. X The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. X i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Vehicles with electrically adjustable seats: to adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats. 118 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically. Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion. : Release lever ; Adjusts the steering wheel height = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up as far as it will go. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Mirrors 119 Mirrors Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. X X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated at low outside temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes. i The exterior mirrors can also be heated manually by switching on the rear window heating. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rear-view mirror Mirrors 120 Folding the exterior mirrors in/out electrically Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in Seats, steering wheel and mirrors manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 261). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 261): If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position (forwards or backwards), proceed as follows: Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: manually move the exterior mirror into the correct position. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold the mirrorfolding button (Y page 120) until you hear a click and the mirror audibly engages into position. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 119). X Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass of an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: Rimmediately rinse off electrolyte from your skin with water. Rimmediately and thoroughly rinse electrolyte out of eyes using clean water. Mirrors electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse out your mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Rif electrolyte comes into contact with skin or eyes or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Rimmediately change out of clothing that has been in contact with electrolyte. Rif an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The "Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Mirror package". The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on and light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Rincident Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side General notes The "Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Memory package". Using reverse gear : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- er's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. You should see the rear wheel and the kerb in the exterior mirror. The parking position is stored. X X i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. Setting and storing the parking position You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Using the memory button You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. X X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rif 121 Memory function 122 Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. You should see the rear wheel and the kerb in the exterior mirror. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Calling up a stored parking position Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side with the corresponding button (Y page 119). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: X Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side. Memory function Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING If the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. If someone becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment is stopped. G WARNING If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock. Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rseat and backrest position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Memory function 123 Adjust the seat (Y page 115). Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side (Y page 119). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant preset position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Z 124 125 Useful information ............................ 126 Exterior lighting ................................ 126 Interior lighting ................................. 132 Replacing bulbs ................................. 133 Lights and windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers ........................... 137 126 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Lights and windscreen wipers ist workshops: (Y page 25). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Driving abroad General notes If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (only vehicles with Intelligent Light System). This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Vehicles with bi-xenon or halogen headlamps It is not necessary to switch your headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered. Legal require- ments are fulfilled without switching the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam. Vehicles with Intelligent Light System Before crossing the border, set the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam and after returning back to asymmetrical dipped beam via the "Dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left" function in the on-board computer (Y page 259). If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and "extended range foglamps" functions are not available. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: Rlight switch Rcombination switch (Y page 129) range adjustment (only vehicles with halogen headlamps) (Y page 128) Ron-board computer (Y page 259) Rheadlamp Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting Exterior lighting led by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps B R Rear foglamp C N Foglamp (vehicles with front fog- lamps only) If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the à position. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 in the ignition lock. Ropen Automatic headlamp mode à is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): Rkey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light Rwith the engine running: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the parking and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically X To switch on the automatic headlamps: turn the light switch to the à position. G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. The daytime driving lights improve the detectability of your vehicle during the day. When the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green T (side lamps) and L (dipped-beam headlamps) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Dipped-beam headlamps When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the L position, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the dipped beam headlamps: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Foglamps In conditions where visibility is poor due to fog, snow or rain, the foglamps improve visibility as well as making it easier for other road users to see you. They can be operated together with the side lamps or together with the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. X To switch on the foglamps: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the foglamps: press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Only vehicles with front foglamps are equipped with the "Foglamps" function; for how to Z Lights and windscreen wipers 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- 127 Exterior lighting 128 Lights and windscreen wipers operate the foglamps on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System (Y page 131). Rear foglamp The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your vehicle in heavy fog for the following traffic. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i When the rear foglamp is switched on, the centre brake lamp in the tail lamp switches off due to a legal requirement. Side lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T side lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left parking lamp. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. To switch on the parking lamps: the key should not be in the ignition lock or it should be in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). X Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied 1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied, luggage compartment laden 3 Driver's and front-passenger seat occupied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. X X Start the engine. Turn the headlamp range control to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Exterior lighting Combination switch Turn signals 129 Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation and deactivation of the main-beam headlamps (Y page 131). Headlamp flasher To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X Headlamp cleaning system Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps: the headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times while the lights are on and the engine is running (Y page 137). When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Hazard warning lamps Main-beam headlamps To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 130 Exterior lighting The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if: Ran airbag is deployed or vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. The hazard warning lamps continue to operate even if the ignition is switched off. Lights and windscreen wipers Rthe way, relevant areas remain illuminated while you are driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. Cornering light function Intelligent Light System General notes The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" function using the on-board computer (Y page 259). Active light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel. Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Motorway mode The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this Exterior lighting Active: if you are driving at a speed above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are driving at a speed above 130 km/h. Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation. 131 Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp. Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp. You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Extended range foglamps Interior lighting 132 Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist recognises road users too late or not at all. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time. Lights and windscreen wipers Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow on the sensors or if the sensors are obscured Rdirt Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off X X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor switches on the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h: The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 30 km/h and no other road users are recognised: The main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 25 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: The main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Headlamps misted up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off ; c Switches the front interior lighting on Replacing bulbs on/off ? | Switches the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off A p Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on/off B Switches the automatic interior lighting control on Rear compartment control panel The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted using COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Ropen Manual interior lighting control To switch the front interior lighting on: set the switch to the c position. X To switch off the interior lighting: set the switch to the | position or (if the door is closed) to the centre position. X To switch the rear interior lighting on or off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamp on or off: press the p button. X : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The colour and brightness for the ambient lighting may be set using COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Automatic interior lighting control To switch on: set the switch to centre position B. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. X Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs G DANGER Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Z Lights and windscreen wipers = v Switches the rear interior lighting 133 134 Replacing bulbs Lights and windscreen wipers Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work on the xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs, you can recognise this by the following: the cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before the engine is started. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs that you cannot replace yourself. Only replace the bulbs listed (Y page 134). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs You can replace the following bulbs. The details for the bulb type can be found in the legend. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only fit spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Rit Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W ; Main-beam headlamp/daytime driving lamp/side lamp/parking lamp: H15 55 W/15 W = Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Replacing bulbs 135 You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp. To remove: switch off the lights. Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is released. X Push cover ; down. X To fit: push cover ; up. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is locked. X Vehicles with Intelligent Light System : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen lamps) Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) : Rear foglamp: P 21 W ; Brake lamp: W 16 W = Brake lamp: W 16 W ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W A Reversing lamp: W 16 W Replacing the front bulbs Fitting/removing the cover on the front wheel arch Remove the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 135). X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; anticlockwise and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 135). X Z Lights and windscreen wipers X Replacing bulbs 136 Lights and windscreen wipers Main-beam headlamps/daytime driving lights/side lamps and parking lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Cornering light function (Intelligent Light System) Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anticlockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; anticlockwise and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anticlockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb ; anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps) X Replacing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn bulb holder : anticlockwise and pull out. X Remove the bulb from bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X View of right-hand side trim panel You must open the side trim panel in the luggage compartment before you can replace the bulbs in the tail lamps. Windscreen wipers Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the luggage compartment. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 136). X X Brake lamp/rear foglamp/reversing lamp: remove the corresponding bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Turn signal: press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage on retaining clips :. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 136). X Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers Press retaining clips : at the same time in the direction of the arrows. X Carefully remove the bulb holder together with the connected plug and the bulbs. X when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. Bulb holder ; Brake lamp = Brake lamp ? Rear foglamp A Reversing light B Turn signals Z Lights and windscreen wipers To open: release right or left side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. X 137 Windscreen wipers 138 Lights and windscreen wipers Switching the rear window wiper on/ off Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor 3 4 5 B set to low sensitivity) Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) ° Continuous wipe, slow ¯ Continuous wipe, fast í Single wipe/î wipes the windscreen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- screen becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wiper to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will no longer be wiped properly. This could mean you are unable to observe the traffic conditions. Combination switch : è Switch 2 ô Wipes with washer fluid 3 I Switches on intermittent wiping 4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping 5 ô Wipes with washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Slide switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, the è symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the instrument cluster. Further information on the assistance graphic (Y page 255). X Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. Windscreen wipers arm is folded away from the windscreen/ rear window. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/ rear window. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen/rear window, the windscreen/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades (variant 1) Removing the wiper blades Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. X Fitting the wiper blades Position new wiper blade : with recess B on lug A. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm until retaining clips ; engage in bracket ?. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. X Replacing the windscreen wiper blades (variant 2) Removing the wiper blades X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. Press both release clips ;. Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = away from wiper arm ?. X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A. X X X Hold onto the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in Z Lights and windscreen wipers ! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiper 139 Windscreen wipers 140 Lights and windscreen wipers the direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Fitting the wiper blades X Remove protective film : of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. If the colour of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. i The duration of the colour change varies depending on the usage conditions. Replacing the rear window wiper blade Removing the wiper blades X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Remove the key from the ignition lock. Fold wiper arm ? away from the rear window. X Press both release clips ;. X X Windscreen wipers 141 Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = away from wiper arm ?. X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A. X Lights and windscreen wipers Fitting a wiper blade Position new wiper blade : with recess B on lug A. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm until retaining clips ; engage in bracket ?. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear window. X Z 142 Windscreen wipers Problems with the windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lights and windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist worknozzles no longer hits shop. the centre of the windscreen. 143 Useful information ............................ 144 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 144 Operating the climate control system ..................................................... 148 Climate control Air vents ............................................ 161 144 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Climate control ist workshops: (Y page 25). Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly air-recirculation mode only briefly Ractivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Ractivate the windscreen demisting function briefly, if required The air-conditioning system/ THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances from the air. The air-conditioning system/ THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and panorama sliding sunroof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 155). Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the side panelling clear (Y page 136). Otherwise the vehicle will not be ventilated correctly. Ractivate i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 102). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. With THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control, gaseous pollutants and odours will also be reduced. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As this depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i Vehicles with auxiliary heating: under certain environmental conditions, the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the key has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. When the automatic climate control drying function is active, the blue LED lamp is lit in the rocker switch in the centre console. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Vehicles without auxiliary heating: under certain environmental conditions, the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the key has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Overview of climate control systems 145 : ; = ? A B C To set the temperature (Y page 150) To demist the windscreen (Y page 152) To set the air distribution (Y page 151) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 154) To set the airflow (Y page 151) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 149) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 153) Notes on using the air-conditioning system Air-conditioning system Below, you can find a number of tips and recommendations for optimum use of the airconditioning system. RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turning control knob A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0). RSet the temperature to 22 †. RRecommendation for avoiding misted windows at low exterior temperatures or in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehumidification function (Y page 149). Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible switch off P and O (Y page 151). Deactivate air-recirculation mode e (Y page 154). Set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 151). RRecommendation for rapid cooling or heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 151). RRecommendation for a constant vehicle interior temperature: set airflow control A to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 151). RRecommendation for air distribution in winter: select the O and ¯ settings (Y page 151). Recommendation for air distribution in summer: select the P or P and ¯ settings (Y page 151). ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. Climate control Control panel for air-conditioning system 146 Overview of climate control systems ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. Climate control if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the Audio/ COMAND display (see separate operating instructions). You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. DYNAMIC SELECT button (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 174). If you have selected drive program E: Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and in the warming-up phase heat output is reduced Rthe rear window heating running time is reduced Depending on the configuration, the climate settings can also be influenced in drive program I. If you have selected drive program C or S, the climate settings are not affected. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 171). Overview of climate control systems 147 : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I J To set the temperature, left (Y page 150) To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 150) To demist the windscreen (Y page 152) To increase the airflow (Y page 151) To set the air distribution (Y page 151) Display To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 154) To switch climate control on/off (Y page 148) To set the temperature, right (Y page 150) To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 155) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 149) To reduce the airflow (Y page 151) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 153) To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 151) Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" func- tion briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (2-zone) 148 Operating the climate control system RUse the residual heat function if you want to Climate control heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the Audio/ COMAND display (see separate operating instructions). You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. DYNAMIC SELECT button (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 174). If you have selected drive program E: Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and in the warming-up phase heat output is reduced Rthe rear window heating running time is reduced Depending on the configuration, the climate settings can also be influenced in drive program I. If you have selected drive program C or S, the climate settings are not affected. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 171). Operating the climate control system Switching the climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, only switch off climate control briefly. Air-conditioning system Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0) (Y page 145). X To switch off: turn control A anti-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 145). X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: switch on climate control primarily using the à button. Operating the climate control system 149 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. X Climate control General notes Operating the climate control system 150 Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivathe ¿ button ted due to a malfunction. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The cooling with air dehumidification function cannot be activated. Climate control Setting climate control to automatic mode General notes Only THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control features the "Control climate control automatically" function. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly. Setting climate control to automatic mode Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X X To switch to manual mode: press the É or Ë button. or X Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Setting the temperature Air-conditioning system You can set the temperature for the entire vehicle. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To increase/reduce: turn control : anticlockwise or clockwise (Y page 145). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To increase/reduce: turn control : or E anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 147). X Operating the climate control system Setting the air distribution Air-conditioning system Air distribution settings ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. i You can also activate several of the air distribution settings simultaneously. In order to do this, press several of the air distribution buttons. The air is then routed through different air vents. i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. Setting the air distribution X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ buttons. The corresponding indicator lamp comes on. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Air distribution settings ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents Setting the air distribution X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. Setting the airflow Air-conditioning system Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To increase/reduce: turn control A anticlockwise or clockwise (Y page 145). X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To increase/reduce: press the K or I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. Climate control Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. 151 Operating the climate control system 152 X Climate control X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Demisting the windscreen General notes You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. i You should only select the "Windscreen demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. Switching the "Windscreen demisting" function on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: i You can adjust the blower output man- ually while the "Windscreen demisting" function is in operation: RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow control A anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 145). RTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: press the ó or ô button. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature control : anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 145). THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: turn temperature control : or E anticlockwise or clockwise (Y page 147). X Rhigh airflow temperature Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i The "Windscreen demisting" function automatically sets the blower output to the optimum demisting effect. As a result, the airflow may increase or decrease automatically after the ¬ button is pressed. Rhigh Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Air-conditioning system Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X Operating the climate control system 153 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Windows misted up on the outside Activate the windscreen wipers. X Set the air distribution to P or O. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Rear window heating General notes The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Climate control X Operating the climate control system 154 Problems with the rear window heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be activated again. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off Climate control General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you activate air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows misting up. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X To activate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. X Air-recirculation mode is activated automatically: Rat high outside temperatures high levels of pollution When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the e button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. Rat i Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 7† Rafter approximately five minutes if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 7 † if the cooling with air dehumidification function is activated Convenience opening or closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, immediately press Operating the climate control system Convenience closing feature (vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the e button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X Convenience closing feature (vehicles without panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the e button until the side windows are closed. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: Press the W button to stop the side windows. The side windows stop. X To then open the side window, press the W button again. or X Press and hold the e button again for at least two seconds. The side windows move in the opposite direction. X Only vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: press the 3 switch to stop the panorama sliding sunroof. The panorama sliding sunroof stops. X To then open the panorama sliding sunroof, pull back on the 3 switch. i Observe the notes on the automatic reversing feature for: X Rthe side windows (Y page 101) Rthe panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 106) X Convenience opening feature (vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the e button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are open. The side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. X Convenience opening feature (vehicles without panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the e button until the side windows are open. The side windows move back to their original positions. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows or the pan- orama sliding sunroof manually after closing with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Switching the residual heat on/off General notes The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Z Climate control the W switch in the door to stop the movement of the side windows. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. 155 Operating the climate control system 156 Switching on/off Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 165). X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. X i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on Climate control Rwhen Auxiliary heating Important safety notes G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: Rhot parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rthe Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. The auxiliary heating and the exhaust gas outlet are situated in front of the right-hand front wheel. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature. This occurs without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank must be at least Õ full to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. Operating the climate control system Before switching on Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Set the desired temperature. X Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also be switched on if the manually set climate control is activated. Optimum comfort is attained by setting the system to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 260). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on or off using the button on the centre console General notes The colours of the indicator lamps on button : signify the following: RBlue: auxiliary ventilation activated auxiliary heating activated RYellow: departure time preselected (Y page 260) RRed: Switching on the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. Switching off the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : goes out. Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on or off using the remote control General notes Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Store the remote control for the auxiliary heating so that the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on unintentionally. In particular, ensure that the remote control for the auxiliary heating is kept out of the reach of children. The remote control has a range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space If the remote control battery is low, the battery symbol on the left of the display is shown as empty. Replace the remote control battery Rsolid Z Climate control The auxiliary heating switches off when the engine is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation switches off when you turn the key to key position 2 (Y page 165). The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. 157 Operating the climate control system 158 and observe the important safety notes when doing so (Y page 159). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. Climate control The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. Remote control : Display ; u Switches on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation/checks status = . Sets the departure time ? ^ Switches off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , Sets the departure time To switch on: press and hold the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. X To switch off: press and hold the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Briefly press the u button. The following messages may appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently activated. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently activated. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes. If the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started, the auxiliary heating running time is increased. The auxiliary heating continues to run until the operat- Operating the climate control system Setting the departure time Make sure that the time set in the vehicle is correct before setting the departure time (see the separate operating instructions). Otherwise, the auxiliary heating may switch on at the wrong time and at an unsuitable location. When setting the departure time, observe the important safety notes (Y page 156). X Briefly press the u button. X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons at the same time. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. X Press the u and ^ buttons at the same time. The new departure time is stored. Activating the set departure time X Briefly press the u button. X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C appear in the display. Deactivating the set departure time Briefly press the u button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Replacing the remote control battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Z Climate control ing temperature is reached. If this is the case, the y symbol appears in the remote control display and the running time is zero minutes. 159 160 Operating the climate control system Climate control Replacing the battery If the battery needs to be replaced, the battery symbol on the left of the display is shown as empty. A CR2450 lithium battery is required when replacing the battery. X Press a pointed object into recess :. X Slide battery cover ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove old battery =. X Insert the new battery with the lettering facing upwards. X Slide battery cover ; in the opposite direction to the arrow on the remote control until it engages. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. Air vents 161 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL¨ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating/ventilation on or off using the remote control. FAIL The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating/ventilation using the remote control. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. The auxiliary heating/ventilation cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The auxiliary heating/ventilation is malfunctioning. X Have the auxiliary heating/ventilation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior i Optimal climate control function is ach- ieved by opening the air vents fully and setting the adjusters to the middle position. Z Climate control Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation Air vents 162 Adjusting the centre air vents To open the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : to the left. X To close the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : clockwise as far as it will go. Climate control X Adjusting the side air vents : Side window demister vent ; Side air vent To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; to the left. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go. X Setting the rear-compartment air vents : Rear-compartment air vent, left ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or down. i If the control panel in the front is switched off, no air can flow through the rear air vents. X 163 Useful information ............................ 164 Driving ............................................... 164 DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 174 DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 175 Manual transmission ........................ 176 Automatic transmission ................... 177 Refuelling ........................................... 188 Parking ............................................... 192 Driving tips ........................................ 195 Driving systems ................................ 199 Towing a trailer ................................. 237 Driving and parking Running-in notes ............................... 164 164 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RVehicles with automatic transmission: try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). After 1500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional notes on running in MercedesAMG vehicles: Rfor the first 1,500 km do not drive at speeds above 140 km/h. allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. You should also observe these notes on running-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed. Ronly Running-in notes Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers Rshoes Driving Key positions Key G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operation and engine speeds greater than 5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This will help to protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation. g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the vehicle Vehicles with manual transmission: the steering is locked when the key is taken out of the ignition lock. i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started. Start/Stop button General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with keys featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Z Driving and parking There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. 165 166 Driving Driving and parking Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. Pre-requisite for this is that: Ryou do not depress the brake pedal (vehicles with automatic transmission) Ryou do not depress the clutch pedal (vehicles with manual transmission) If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately (vehicles with automatic transmission). If you depress the clutch pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately (vehicles with manual transmission). To start the vehicle without actively using the key: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock Rthe key must be in the vehicle Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 87) Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of KEYLESSGO. If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with the Start/Stop button : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock When you switch on the ignition, all of the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving (Y page 303). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when Ryou will not be able to start the engine with X with the Start/Stop button the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 94), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/ Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This in this position To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is deactivated again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. You can only switch between Start/Stop button mode and key operation when the vehicle is stationary. You must also engage park position P (vehicles with automatic transmission). X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the key is in the vehicle: Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated Starting the vehicle Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. General notes Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine runs at a higher engine speed during the cold start procedure so that the catalytic converter can reach operating temperature more quickly. The sound of the engine may change as a result. Manual transmission You can only start the engine when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to neutral N. Z 167 Driving and parking Driving Driving 168 Automatic transmission Driving and parking X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 178). The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 178). i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. Starting procedure with the key To start the engine using the key instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 165) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Starting procedure using the Start/ Stop button The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid key is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. Vehicles with automatic transmission: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 165). Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine starts. Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is activated and the engine starts. X Pulling away General notes G WARNING Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the engine speed is above the engine idling speed and you then engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always keep the brake pedal firmly depressed and do not depress the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Vehicles with manual transmission: change gear in good time and avoid spinning the wheels. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 260). Vehicles with automatic transmission: it is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not depress the brake pedal, the selector lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. Vehicles with automatic transmission: at transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 †, you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. i Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion: upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Vehicles with automatic transmission: information on automatically releasing the electric parking brake (Y page 193). Pulling away with a trailer The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains lit. X Depress the accelerator pedal. X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release lever :. the electric parking brake is released The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. For further information on the electric parking brake, see (Y page 193). Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a while, hill start assist no longer holds the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, apply the electric parking brake. X Press and hold handle :. The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N Rthe electric parking brake is applied RESP® is malfunctioning Further information on holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 182). Z 169 Driving and parking Driving 170 Driving ECO start/stop function Driving and parking Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button. If the è ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically once the vehicle stops moving. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 171) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the è ECO symbol is not displayed. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/ stop function is only available in drive program C. Automatic engine switch-off General notes The ECO start/stop function is operational and the è ECO symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened If the conditions for automatic engine switchoff are not all fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in yellow. All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. The engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (initial stop, then three subsequent stops) in succession. The è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the è ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again possible. Vehicles with manual transmission Driving Vehicles with automatic transmission If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the transmission in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. The engine is started automatically if you: Rdepress Rdepress the clutch pedal fully the accelerator pedal Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brake pedal in transmission position D or N when the HOLD function is not active Rdepress the accelerator pedal Rmove the transmission out of position P Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the è ECO symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on Automatic engine start General notes The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low Vehicles with manual transmission ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. X To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; and the è ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 170) are fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 170) are not all fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, Z Driving and parking The ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically at low speeds. X Brake the vehicle. X Shift to neutral N (Y page 176) (follow gearshift instruction : to shift into neutral N, if necessary). X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off automatically. 171 Driving 172 Driving and parking the ECO start/stop function is not available. If indicator lamp ; on ECO button : is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. AMG performance exhaust system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between different AMG Performance exhaust system volumes using the position of the exhaust flap. If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected setting is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, the quietest setting is activated when the engine is next started. Setting the volume: X Press button :. If you select the loudest setting, indicator lamp ; lights up. The volume of the AMG Performance exhaust system can also be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 175). Driving 173 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 211) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 204). X Try to start the engine again. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. The engine does not start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 167). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 360). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. X If the engine still does not start: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 174 DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to coolant warning lamp cool down. may also be on and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 338). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping system or AMG RIDE CONTROL) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four X Press DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the Audio 20 or COMAND Online display. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the quality of the available fuel. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of the display in the Audio 20 or COMAND Online display. Available drive programs: C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics I Individual Individual settings E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information for drive programs (Y page 183). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. Further information on the manual drive program (Y page 185). DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive transmission management RESP® Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL) Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe availability of gliding mode Rthe If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. X Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC SELECT controller : lights up in red. Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings C Comfort Comfort-orientated, engine and transmission settings optimised for economy S Sport Sporty engine and transmission settings S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty transmission settings RACE Maximum sportiness and engine and transmission settings suitable for the racetrack Additional information for drive programs (Y page 183). Z 175 Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 176 Manual transmission Driving and parking You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. Further information on the manual drive program (Y page 185). Shifting to neutral N Manual transmission Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. ! When shifting to 5th and 6th gear, you must press the shift lever to the right. Otherwise, you could shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the engine or transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. ! On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. This uses the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. k Reverse gear 1 - 6 Forward gears X X Depress the clutch pedal fully. Shift the gear lever to position N :. Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. X Pull the gear lever up, push it to the left and then pull it back. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 170). Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift gear according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Automatic transmission Automatic transmission Drive program C (Comfort) Important safety notes Drive program C is characterised by the following: G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine settings. Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping system) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control Information about configuring drive program I with COMAND Online or Audio 20 can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Rthe performance of the air-conditioning and heating systems is reduced. j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. Z Driving and parking Drive programs 177 Driving and parking 178 Automatic transmission For information on the selector lever in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 180). The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 178). Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. j k i h X Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display. Engaging park position P When you have engaged park position P, make sure that the transmission position display shows P in the multifunction display. You can only engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary. Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in neutral N. At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 †, you can only shift out of park position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. In order to shift from park position P directly into R or D: ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift Rdepress : Transmission position ; Gear = Drive program display The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance Rpush Automatic transmission Park position P is automatically engaged if: Shifting to neutral N Ryou switch off the engine using the key and G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ryou Ropen doors and endanger other persons or remove the key switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 212) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 207). Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. X The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 170). road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the key: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: Z Driving and parking Engaging park position P automatically 179 Automatic transmission 180 With the key: Switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. Driving and parking X Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Overview of transmission positions With the Start/Stop button: Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X : Transmission position display ; Drive program display If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program C or S. Automatic transmission Transmission positions B X When the vehicle is stationary, press button :. Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 178). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In order to secure the vehicle, always apply the electric parking brake in addition to the parking lock. In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the key and remove the key Ryou switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary. Z Driving and parking Engaging park position P 181 182 Automatic transmission Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. Driving and parking A ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. 7 Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Rthe selected drive program position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Rthe Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients G WARNING If the clutch overheats, the electronic management system is automatically deactivated. This interrupts the power transmission. The vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk of an accident. Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator. The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a warning tone sounds. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the Stop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running display message appears in the multifunction display. You will only be able to continue your journey once the clutch has cooled down and the display message in the multifunction display has disappeared. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care display message appears in the multifunction display. Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by: Rdepressing the brake pedal the HOLD function Rengaging the electric parking brake Ractivating Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration: Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Automatic transmission Towing a trailer Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 239). X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, select a lower gear (Y page 197), even if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS, or SPEEDTRONIC are activated. Drive programs All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine settings. automatic transmission shifting up later. as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher. Rthe Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with damping system or AMG RIDE CONTROL) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control Information about configuring drive program I with COMAND Online or Audio 20 can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. i To permanently select the gears in drive program I using the steering wheel paddles, select the M (manual) setting for the drive. Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being Roptimal Z Driving and parking Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in the automatic drive programs and in temporary manual drive program M. When manual drive program M is selected permanently, kickdown is not possible. For further information on kickdown in manual drive program M (Y page 187). 183 Driving and parking 184 Automatic transmission driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is activated automatically when engine-internal conditions are fulfilled and the accelerator is not depressed. At the same time the transmission’s clutch opens and the vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic energy. As a result great distances can be completed without the engine brake and fuel consumption reduced. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine management) transmission management Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL) RESP® Information about configuring drive program I with COMAND Online or Audio 20 can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Rthe Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is available. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher. Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR RIDE CONTROL). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driv- ing characteristics. automatic transmission shifting up later. Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR RIDE CONTROL). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Rthe Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL) Drive program RACE is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack. Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum sportiness. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. Automatic transmission a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR RIDE CONTROL). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Manual gearshifting General notes You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D. Depending on which gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear up or down, if permitted. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shifting, you have two options: Rtemporary setting setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position D. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. Rpermanent To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D. X Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle : or ;. X Temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ; and hold it in place. or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the transmission position. or X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Temporary setting To activate: shift the selector lever to position D. X Press button :. X X To deactivate: press button :. or X If position D (automatic transmission) is selected for the transmission in drive proZ Driving and parking Ras 185 Automatic transmission 186 gram I: shift to drive program I with the DYNAMIC SELECT controller. Gearshift recommendation Driving and parking Shifting gears ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display. Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! The automatic transmission does not shift To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. X up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear : when message ; is shown in the multifunction display. Automatic transmission 187 Kickdown For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. Driving and parking X During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in temporary manual drive program M. When manual drive program M is selected permanently, kickdown is not possible. Z 188 Refuelling Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. X Stop. The transmission no X Shift the transmission to position P. longer shifts into all of X Switch off the engine. the gears. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. Reverse gear can no X Shift the transmission to position D. longer be engaged. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong Refuelling Opening the fuel filler flap ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. Further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 402). Refuelling General notes The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automatically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the key. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. : ; = ? To open the fuel filler flap Tyre pressure table To insert the fuel filler cap Instruction label on the fuel type to be refuelled Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap =. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Z Driving and parking fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. 189 Refuelling 190 Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. Driving and parking X Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Refuelling 191 Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Turn the key to position 0 immediately and remove it (Y page 165). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 165). X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again a maximum of ten seconds (Y page 165). X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 87). The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 89). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problem 192 Parking Rthe Parking Driving and parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is safeguarded against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, engage 1st gear or reverse gear. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position P and the transmission position display must show P in the multifunction display. key must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the kerb. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with manual transmission Shift to either 1st gear or reverse gear R. With the key: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 165). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". X Apply the electric parking brake. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission X Apply the electric parking brake. X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position P. Parking 193 Release the brake pedal. Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X With the Start/Stop button: Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :. With the key: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 165). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the key: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: With the key: Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Z Driving and parking X Parking Driving and parking 194 The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it from rolling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake carries out a function check at regular intervals when the engine is switched off. Noises that occur are normal. Applying or releasing manually The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button Applying automatically (vehicles with automatic transmission) The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle :. The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthere is a system malfunction power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe X X To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the key is removed. To release: pull handle :. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Applying automatically (vehicles with manual transmission) When the vehicle's HOLD function is holding the vehicle at a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied automatically. In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe X engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is open is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthere Releasing automatically The electric parking brake can only be released automatically in vehicles with automatic transmission. The electric parking brake of your vehicle is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running transmission is in position D or R Rthe seat belt is fastened Ryou depress the accelerator pedal If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 193). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Release park. brake message appears Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Rthe Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Z 195 Driving and parking Driving tips 196 Driving tips Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: Driving and parking RThe tyres should always be inflated to the recommended tyre pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RRemove roof racks when they are not needed. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RHave all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Service Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain. ECO display The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration RConstant RCoasting The percentage count is the mean value of the three bar values. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage count indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption. In addition to driving style, the consumption is affected by many other factors, such as: Rload Rtyre pressure start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. The evaluation of your driving style takes the following three categories into consideration: RAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): - the bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds - the bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behaviour at all times:) - the bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration - the bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes): - the bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. - the bar empties: frequent braking An economical driving style involves driving at a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant Constant: Robserve the gearshift recommendation Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E (vehicles with DYNAMIC SELECT button). On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the bar for Constant will change. The ECO display summarises the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its Rcold Driving tips Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to activate manual gearshifting (Y page 185). This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated (vehicles with automatic transmission): the automatic transmission may switch back to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's braking effect. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed, paying attention to traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water. You will have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. Z Driving and parking completion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the bars at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more dynamic changes, perform a manual reset. Further information on the ECO display (Y page 250). 197 Driving and parking 198 Driving tips This can increase the braking distance considerably. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehicle in front. New brake pads/linings Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, drive in the following manner in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which aquaplaning can occur: Rthe Rlower your speed Ravoid tyre ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you must drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rin the case of standing water, the water level must be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Further information on driving with snow chains (Y page 373). Further information on driving with summer tyres (Y page 372). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 372). Driving systems of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual shift drive program M (Y page 185). By doing so, you will make use Z 199 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 200 Cruise control lever Activation conditions Driving and parking To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe : To activate or increase speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To activate at the current speed/last stored speed ? To activate or reduce speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. Selecting cruise control To select cruise control: check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on or off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. X If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. X electric parking brake must be released. Ryou are driving faster than 30 km/h. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in position D. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, a gear must be engaged. Rcruise control must be selected. Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle. i Vehicles with manual transmission: RAlways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds. RChange gear in good time. RIf possible, do not change down several gears at a time. Driving systems G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Setting a speed Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ? beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Brake. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rwhile driving a vehicle with manual transmission, you shift into neutral or depress the clutch pedal for longer than six seconds Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high, and as a result the engine speed is too low Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, you shift to position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐ trol off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Z Driving and parking Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed 201 202 Driving systems SPEEDTRONIC Driving and parking General notes SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual shift drive program M (Y page 185). By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 204) Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes : To activate or increase speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To activate at the current speed/last stored speed ? To activate or reduce speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control i The speed indicated in the speedometer With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: Important safety notes RLIM may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected When the engine is running, you can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed between 30 km/h and the technically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle. If the set value of permanent SPEEDTRONIC is lower then this value applies (Y page 204). Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. Driving systems Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display. Storing or calling up the speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. Setting a speed X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : beyond the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Switching SPEEDTRONIC to passive If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC is switched to passive mode. The following message appears in the multifunction display: SPEEDTRONIC passive. passive You can then exceed the stored speed. SPEEDTRONIC is activated again if you: Rdrive slower than the stored speed without kickdown Rset a new speed or Rcall up the last speed stored again The SPEEDTRONIC passive message in the multifunction display disappears. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Vehicles with manual transmission: SPEEDTRONIC switches off if you shift to a higher gear and as a result, the engine speed is too low. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Z Driving and parking If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. 203 204 Driving systems Driving and parking Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 259). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to maintain the designated distance from the vehicle in front. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly recognise other road users and complex traffic conditions. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be prepared to brake, particularly if DISTRONIC PLUS warns you. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident. Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. Driving systems Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and weather conditions or traffic conditions into account. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed can: Rsnow Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever Driving and parking To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: 205 : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed or to call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS You can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. Z Driving and parking 206 Driving systems If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. X If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and the rear doors must be closed. Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be selected with the cruise control lever (Y page 205). Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, up : or down A. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. The position of the accelerator pedal will determine the speed. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h. Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated when you depress the brake, except when the vehicle is stationary. X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. The vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Driving systems Changing lanes If you change to the overtaking lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/h PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the respective turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. RDISTRONIC Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 209). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system fault occurs power supply is insufficient If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Rthe Z Driving and parking Selecting the drive program DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you select the S+ drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles only), S (Y page 183) or the manual drive program (Y page 185). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E (C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles:) drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-start traffic. 207 208 Driving systems Driving and parking Setting a speed Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 209). i Make sure that you maintain the miniBear in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever briefly up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. mum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. To increase: turn control = in direction ;. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X Driving systems Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS vehicle is skidding activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. 209 Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. If you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and there are no vehicles detected in front, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated In the Assistance menu (Y page 255) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphic. Z Driving and parking Ryou Driving systems 210 Driving and parking X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 255). Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Assistance graphic : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, entering and exiting a bend the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 255). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated You will initially see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane Assistance graphic : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Driving systems Other vehicles changing lane 211 detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Driving and parking Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the Z 212 Driving systems Driving and parking Important safety notes Activating the HOLD function G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 212). Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Rthe Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission: only when the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles with automatic transmission. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. i After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission Driving systems Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system fault occurs power supply is insufficient Rthe Vehicles with manual transmission The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated and: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient The Brake immediately message may also appear in the multifunction display. X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. The HOLD function is deactivated. A horn will sound at regular intervals if you turn off the engine, take off your seat belt or open the driver's door when the HOLD function is activated. The horn alerts you to the fact that the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you have deactivated the HOLD function. i Once you have switched off the engine, you cannot restart it until you have deactivated the HOLD function. Start-off assist (except MercedesAMG vehicles) Important safety notes G WARNING If you use start-off assist, individual wheels may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a greater danger of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the area around the vehicle. Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, along with the tyres and vehicle being in good condition. Do not activate start-off assist on public roads. Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 72). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 76). Activating start-off assist Deactivate ESP® (Y page 256). X Turn the steering wheel to the straightahead position. X Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and keep the brake pedal depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D. X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select the S drive program (Y page 174). X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. i Activate ESP® as soon as the acceleration process has ended. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. X Z Driving and parking When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: 213 Driving systems 214 Cancelling start-off assist Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. X Reactivate ESP. Driving and parking X RACE START (AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i RACE START must not be used on normal roads. RACE START must only be activated and used on dedicated road circuits, outside of public road use. i RACE START is only available in Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. G WARNING If you use RACE START, individual tyres may get into a spin and the vehicle could skid. Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are within range of the vehicle. RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. For this, a suitably highgrip road surface is required, along with the tyres and vehicle being in good condition. i Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 72). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 76). Activation conditions You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors, the bonnet and the boot lid are closed Rthe engine is running and the transmission, traction control and engine are at operating temperature Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) Rthe transmission is in position D Rdrive program S, S+ or RACE is selected (Y page 175) Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Pull and hold both steering wheel gearshift paddles. X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X Release both steering wheel gearshift paddles. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Own‐ er's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. X X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 185). or To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 185). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal within a few seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed increases. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. Driving systems Sport mode RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible or RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. i After using it several times in short succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven. AMG RIDE CONTROL General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of "Sport" or "Comfort" The suspension setting is adjusted using the corresponding button in the centre console. Rthe i The mode can also be set using the AMG DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 175). If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, Comfort mode is activated when the engine is next started. The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button : once. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. motorways. X Press button : again to switch off indicator lamp ;. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. 4MATIC ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the differential. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. Z Driving and parking The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display. 215 Driving and parking 216 Driving systems 4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. Raccelerate less when driving. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. Chassis with adaptive adjustable damping General notes A suspension with the Adaptive Damping System provides improved driving comfort and continuously controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping characteristics adapt to the current operating and driving situation. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface conditions Rthe drive program selected Rthe vehicle level setting The drive program can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 174). Rthe Selecting Comfort mode In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this drive program if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also select the Comfort drive program when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : (Y page 174) repeatedly until the Comfort drive program is selected. Selecting Sport mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : (Y page 174) repeatedly until the Sport drive program is selected. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition to position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Rshift : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 344). Range Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles Front sensors Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm Z 217 Driving and parking Driving systems 218 Driving systems Driving and parking Rear sensors Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm Minimum distance Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 20 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The gear lever position or the transmission position of the automatic transmission and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Manual transmission: Gear lever position Warning display Forward gear or Neutral Front area activated Reverse gear or Rear and front areas the vehicle is rolling activated backwards Automatic transmission: Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Driving systems 219 Driving and parking Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Z 220 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactivated. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 344). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 216). i The active braking application is only available on vehicles with automatic transmission. Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the manoeuvring range. When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Driving systems Rparking or stopping prohibitions Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Runsuitable surfaces Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 218) warning messages during the parking procedure Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces that are: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement For vehicles with the trailer tow hitch folded out, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly longer. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connection is established Ron between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early vehicle may not stop in front of these objects This could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. Rthe For further information on the detection range (Y page 217). Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low kerb Ryou forward park Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a kerb system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to manoeuvre into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Rthe Z Driving and parking Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: 221 Driving and parking 222 Driving systems Example: parking symbol : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel are parallel to the direction of travel and are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m wider than your vehicle Rthat by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Parking G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away. i Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion: When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time. i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the length of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit in the parking space. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Active Parking Assist Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift into position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundingsmessurroundings sage appears in the multifunction display. Release the multifunction steering wheel. Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, drive at a speed below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage forward gear Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to first gear while the vehicle is stationary. Vehicles with automatic transmission: select transmission position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundingsmessurroundings sage appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the front border of the parking space. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage reverse gear Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the Z 223 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking 224 location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when exiting the parking space: Ryou need to have parked using Active Park- ing Assist. border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A kerb stone is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is manoeuvred into the parking space. Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. Rthe i Vehicles with automatic transmission: If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time. Start the engine. Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you will drive out of the parking space. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position D or R. Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to forward or reverse gear. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: message appears in the multifunction display %. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop, at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position D or R. Vehicles with manual transmission: depending on the message or as required, engage forward or reverse gear. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you reverse after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop, at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone. X Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example, when you recognise that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist cancelled message. When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator pedal again. Reversing camera General notes Cancelling Active Parking Assist X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 219). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is applied position P is selected in vehicles with automatic transmission Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Rtransmission Reversing camera : is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It uses guide lines to show the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. i The text shown in the Audio/COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera displays in the Audio/COMAND display. See the notes on cleaning (Y page 344). Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. Z 225 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 226 Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Driving and parking Rif the tailgate is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 344) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). Rin Activating/deactivating the reversing camera COMAND Online; see the Digital Owner's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display. The image from the reversing camera is available throughout the manoeuvring process. X To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the Audio 20/COMAND controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer". The symbol of the selected function is highlighted. To deactivate: the reversing camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Displays in the Audio 20/COMAND display The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle Runder ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in Audio 20/ X : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 218), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display. "Reverse parking" function Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle : White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Z 227 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 228 = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approx- Driving and parking imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 226). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. X : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 226). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary. : Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position. Red guide line : is then at the end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. "Coupling up a trailer" function : Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the ball coupling ; Trailer drawbar locating aid = Trailer drawbar ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function A Ball coupling Select symbol ? using the controller. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling. X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar locating aid ; points approximately in the direction of trailer drawbar =. X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar = reaches the red guide line. The distance between the trailer drawbar and the red guide line is now approximately 0.30 m. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 239). X : Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Trailer drawbar This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch. X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling. X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. Z 229 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 230 Driving systems Wide-angle function you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays Ryou Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. Rif switch off the engine take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Ryou Displaying the attention level ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 255) of the on-board computer. X Select the assistance graphics display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 255). The following information is displayed: Rthe length of the journey since the last break Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST (Attention Attention level), level displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h. Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 257). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: If Standard is selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. If Sensitive is selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been switched off. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a break!. break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. If a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND Online. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND Online. Traffic Sign Assist General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted and overtaking restrictions to the driver in the instrument cluster. Driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction triggers a warning. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with multifunction camera : attached at the top of the windscreen. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are also used to determine the current speed limit. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits and overtaking restrictions is updated. The display can also be updated without a visible traffic sign if: Rthe vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorway exit or slip road) Ra village or town boundary is passed which is stored in the digital map Rthe last traffic sign detected by the camera has not been repeated Z 231 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 232 Driving systems If a sign indicating the end of a restriction (speed limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the sign is displayed for five seconds. The currently applicable traffic regulation continues to be shown in the assistance graphic display (Y page 255). The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions). The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if: Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rthere is dirt, ice or misting on the windscreen in the vicinity of the camera Rtraffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice, snow) Rthe traffic signs are insufficiently lit at night Rsigns are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes) Rthe information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date Activating Traffic Sign Assist X Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display using the on-board computer (Y page 256). If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist display in the on-board computer, the traffic regulations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions) are displayed in the instrument cluster for five seconds respectively. The wrong-way warning and the traffic sign display for speed limits and overtaking restrictions remain active in the Assist graphic even when the display has been deactivated. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, display : is shown in the multifunction display. Instrument cluster display Important safety notes i The following illustrations are examples of Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits and overtaking restrictions. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. vehicles with colour multifunction display. The illustrations of vehicles with black and white multifunction display differ from them. i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum permitted speed. Speed limit with overtaking restriction A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h (60 mph) : and an overtaking restriction ; apply. : Maximum permitted speed ; Additional signs for wet conditions Speed limits in wet conditions A maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (80 mph) applies in wet conditions and when Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the restriction must be observed. : Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant = Additional sign for unknown restriction Speed limit with unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply. End of an overtaking restriction A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h (60 mph) : applies. The overtaking restriction no longer applies ;. The traffic sign for signalling the end of an overtaking restriction is displayed for five seconds. Z 233 Driving and parking Driving systems 234 Driving systems Driving and parking End of a speed limit No speed limit : applies here. Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: Rovertaken No entry (wrong-way warning) A warning message : is displayed in the instrument cluster if Traffic Sign Assist detects that you are passing a “no entry” sign and you are driving in the wrong direction. You will then also hear a warning tone. You should immediately check your direction of travel in order to avoid danger to yourself and other road users. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 234) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 236). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rwhen the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle or a bicycle Rvery wide lanes Rnarrow lanes Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane Rbarriers or other road boundaries Ra Driving systems Warning display : Warning display Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the picture. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Z Driving and parking Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. 235 Driving and parking 236 Driving systems Activating Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 257). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Towing a trailer If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors light up yellow and the Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors. To do so, you will need to deactivate Blind Spot Assist if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock Rthe engine is not running electrical connection to the trailer has been established Rthe Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunc- tion camera : attached at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in a speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings. In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Rnot G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. Towing a trailer Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road Activating Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 257). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lane markings in the assistance graphics display (Y page 255) are shown in green. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway Rthe system detects solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes cut the corner on a bend Towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination if it begins to swerve. The vehicle/trailer combination could even overturn. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten out the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing speed. Decrease your speed and do not countersteer. Brake if necessary. G WARNING If the maximum the permissible load for a carrier system is exceeded, the carrier could come loose from the vehicle and endanger Z Driving and parking The system may be impaired or may not function if: 237 238 Towing a trailer Driving and parking other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never exceed the permissible noseweight when using a carrier. Exceeding the maximum permissible noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling may cause damage to the following: Ryour vehicle trailer Rthe ball coupling Rtrailer tow hitch The vehicle/trailer combination could become unstable. If the noseweight used is lower than the minimum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/ trailer combination could also become unstable. To avoid hazardous situations: Rthe Rmake sure to check the noseweight before each journey Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum noseweight Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible noseweight Rdo not use a noseweight lower than the minimum noseweight Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found: Rthe Rin your vehicle documents Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch and the trailer the vehicle identification plate If the values differ, the lowest value applies. Ron You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (Y page 412). G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning circle This can impair the vehicle's handling characteristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully. When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination. Ris Notes on towing a trailer General notes Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: RMercedes‑AMG CLA 45 4MATIC with AMG Line When towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for the maximum load. Further information on the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 374). Please note that when towing a trailer, the following driving systems have limited availability or are not available at all. RVehicles RPARKTRONIC (Y page 216) Spot Assist (Y page 234) The height of the ball coupling changes with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. You will find fitting dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (Y page 411). RBlind Driving tips Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 79). The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer and it will consume more fuel. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual drive program M (Y page 185). This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated (vehicles with automatic transmission): the automatic transmission may switch back to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's braking effect. Driving tips If the trailer swings from side to side: Do not accelerate. Do not countersteer. X Brake if necessary. X X RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradient- RAvoid Z 239 Driving and parking Towing a trailer Towing a trailer 240 Driving and parking climbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. Folding out the ball coupling G WARNING If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an accident. Always engage the ball coupling as described. G WARNING X X If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Pull out release wheel =. Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far as it will go. The ball coupling disengages and folds out behind the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side panelling in the luggage compartment. Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. The indicator lamp on the release wheel goes out. The power socket folds down automatically. The multifunction display shows the Check trailer hitch lock display message until the ball coupling is engaged. X Remove the protective covering from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place. X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling is clean and that it is either greased or dry (grease free), depending on the instructions for the trailer. X X To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise, the fold down and remove cover ;. Towing a trailer Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Position the trailer horizontally behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electric connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. A connected trailer is only recognised when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The function of other systems, such as ESP® or PARKTRONIC also depends on this. X Folding in the ball coupling G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side panelling in the luggage compartment. X Place the protective covering on the ball coupling. Uncoupling a trailer G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. X To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise, then fold down and remove cover ;. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. X Z Driving and parking Coupling up a trailer 241 Towing a trailer 242 X Driving and parking X Pull out release wheel =. Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far as it will go. The ball coupling disengages and folds out behind the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. You can find more information about fitting the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist workshop. X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key to position 2 or 0 respectively (Y page 165). Failure check for LEDs X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages behind the bumper. The indicator lamp on the release knob and the message in the multifunction display go out. Trailer power supply ! You can connect accessories to the per- manent power supply up to a maximum of 240 W. You cannot charge a trailer battery using the power supply. When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, a malfunction message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message may be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 mA. To ensure reliable operation of the failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA. Trailer with 7-pin connector General notes Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Fitting the adapter ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. 243 Driving and parking Towing a trailer Open the socket cover. Insert the plug connector with lug : into groove = on the socket. X Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X X Z 244 Useful information ............................ 246 Important safety notes ..................... 246 Displays and operation ..................... 246 Menus and submenus ...................... 249 Display messages ............................. 265 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 301 On-board computer and displays 245 On-board computer and displays 246 Displays and operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 32). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 32). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or anti-clockwise. If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or L position, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. Speedometer with segments The speedometer is divided into segments only on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated (Y page 202): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 204): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Rev counter Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The engine is limited within a range to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Operating the on-board computer Overview Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the measured air temperature and not the road surface temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 249). There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature appears in the multifunction display. Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32). Z 247 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 248 Displays and operation Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: % RBack up the menu and menu bar through lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RVehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control of the navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND Online: switches off LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions) RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory RScrolls RSelects 9 : Press and hold: a % up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ó with Audio 20: Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND Online: Switches off LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions) 8 RMute W X RAdjusts ~ RRejects RConfirms the selection or display message the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number Press and hold: RCalls RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre- set list or a station list in the desired frequency range or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open Press briefly: RIn RVehicles the volume or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches Multifunction display transmission (shifting manually) (Y page 185) Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 220) R¯ Cruise control (Y page 199) RÈ SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 202) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 131) Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 170) Rë HOLD function (Y page 211) R120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) Menus and submenus : Permanent display: outside temperature ; = ? A B or speed (Y page 258) Time Text field Menu bar Drive program (Y page 178) Transmission position (Y page 180) Vehicles with manual transmission: the indicators in the lower part of the multifunction display differ from those shown here. For Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in the lower and upper part of the multifunction display differ from those shown here. X To display menu bar ?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. i Set the time using Audio 20 or COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). Menu overview Using the = or ; button on the steering wheel, open the menu bar. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 247). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 250) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 251) RAudio menu (Y page 253) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 254) RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 255) RServ. menu (Y page 257) RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 258) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 262) The displays for the Audio Audio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly to those in your vehicle. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND Online. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: RZ Gearshift recommendation for manual transmission (Y page 176) or for automatic Z 249 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 250 Trip menu Standard display When 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From reset. reset ECO display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; appears. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" The ECO display is not available in MercedesAMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. Further information on the ECO display (Y page 196). : ; = ? Distance Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From start or From reset. reset X The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 251). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From start: start Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays range :. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the display with approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refuelled C appears instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select digital speedometer ;. Gearshift recommendation : Z may also be displayed. Observe the information on gearshift recommendation : for manual transmission (Y page 176) or for automatic transmission (shifting manually) (Y page 185). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display and not in the digital speedometer display. X X X Press a to confirm. Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip meter start" trip computer R"From reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the "ECO display", the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the "ECO display" are also reset. R"From Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. Further information on navigation can be found in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND Online operating instructions. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. Route guidance not active Resetting values : Direction of travel ; Current road Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Z 251 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 252 Menus and submenus Route guidance active No change of direction announced : ; = ? Distance to the destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road Symbol indicating "follow the road's course" Change of direction without lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. Other status indicators of the navigation system The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. Possible displays RNew route... or Calculating route... A new route is calculated. not mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognised, e.g. new roads, car parks or private land. RNo route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Audio player or audio media operation RRoad Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Active station list ; Station with preset position The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown. X To select a station: briefly press 9 or :. i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast- : Current track Audio files from various audio players or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online and select audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track appears. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio players or media support this function. X If track information is stored on the audio player or media, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. Video DVD operation Only for vehicles with COMAND Online: you can use the Audio menu to play video DVDs. ing) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 254 Switch on COMAND Online and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : appears. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service: service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rat Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket (Y page 329). or X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio 20 or COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. Rejecting or ending a call You can reject or end a call any time even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end an incoming call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Authorise access to the phone book on the phone. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. X Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Assist. menu: RShowing the assistance graphic (Y page 255) RActivating/deactivating the Traffic Sign Assist message function (Y page 256) RActivating/deactivating ESP® (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 256) RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 256) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 257) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist (Y page 257) RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 257) Showing the assistance graphic Z 255 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 256 Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assistance graphic. graphic X Press a to confirm. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. The assistance graphic shows you the status of and/or information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 231) RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 204) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 73) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 230) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 236) RRear window wiper (Y page 138) X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. X Traffic Sign Assist In the Traffic Sign Assist menu, you can switch the Traffic Sign Assist message function on or off. When the message function is activated, detected traffic signs and information appear in the multifunction display for five seconds. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Traffic Sign Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate the message function: press a again. Further information about Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 231). Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 77). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Deactivating/activating ESP® on MercedesAMG vehicles (Y page 78). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 76). X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select ESP ESP. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. Rin If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 306). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 266). Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Collision Prevent. Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. X For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 73). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Sensitive Sensitive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. X For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 230). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keeping Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a again to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. X For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 236). Service menu Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu: RCalling up display messages in the message memory (Y page 265) RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 376) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 340) Further information about Blind Spot Assist (Y page 234). Z 257 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 258 Menus and submenus Settings menu Introduction Rcurrent fuel consumption and approximate range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rcruise Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, In the Settings menu you have the following options: RChanging the instrument cluster settings RChanging the light settings RChanging the vehicle settings RChanging the heating settings RChanging the convenience settings RRestoring the factory settings Instrument cluster Selecting the distance unit The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. miles X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to the: Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu distance recorder and the trip meter Rtrip computer Rtotal Switching the additional speedometer on/off United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. If the additional speedometer is switched on, the speed is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display instead of the outside temperature. The speed display is inverse to your speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dig. speedo [mph] function. You will see the selected setting: on or off off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting permanent display United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. The Permanent display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed. The speed display is inverse to your speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent display: function. The current setting, outside tempera‐ ture or Dig. speedo [mph]:, [mph]: appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Lights Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intell. Light System function. If the Intell. Light Sys. function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you switch Intell. Light System function on, you activate the following functions: RMotorway mode RActive light function RCornering light function RExtended range foglamps If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction display shows the Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic display message instead of the Intell. Light System function in the Lights submenu. Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 130). Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right This function is only available in vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 126). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. The current setting Right-side traffic or Left-side traffic appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. These are only deactivated if the setting for driving on the left/right is set opposite to your vehicle's country version. A qualified specialist workshop can set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right. Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC using the Limit speed (winter tyres) function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. You will see the current setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten (160 160 km/h to 240 km/h). km/h The Off set- Z 259 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 260 Menus and submenus ting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. For further information on permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 204). Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door locks function. If the Automatic door locks function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the doors in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you activate the Automatic door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. For further information on the automatic locking feature; see (Y page 95). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Heating Auxiliary heating departure time G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: Rhot parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rthe Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Only vehicles with auxiliary heating have this function. In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the set air conditioning or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. Further information on auxiliary heating (Y page 156). Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. The current setting appears. X Press a again. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press a to confirm. If a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. The current setting appears. Press the : or 9 button to select Change A, A Change B or Change C. C X Press a to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. X Comfort Switching belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 47). Switching the fold mirrors in when locking function on/off This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function. When you activate the Auto. fold-in mir‐ rors function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched on the Auto. fold-in mirrors function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 120), they will not fold out automat- Z 261 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 262 ically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold-in mirrors function. If the Auto. fold-in mirrors function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Resetting to factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? function appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) WARMUP : ; = ? A B X Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Transmission oil temperature Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Engine and transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. SETUP : Drive system Comfort Comfort/Sport Sport/Sport Sport + ; Suspension Comfort Comfort/Sport Sport/Sport Sport + = Transmission D/M M ? ESP® On On/Off Off or SPORT handling mode Displaying the intermediate time Sport SETUP displays the following information and functions: Rthe digital speedometer gear indicator Rthe drive system setting Rthe suspension mode Rthe transmission position Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears. Rthe Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. Time X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is shown for five seconds. X Starting a new lap RACETIMER Displaying and starting the RACETIMER : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap i A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The : Lap ; RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. 16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐ ish Lap. Lap Stopping the RACETIMER X Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Confirm Yes with a. X The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position Z 263 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 264 Menus and submenus 3 and then press a to confirm Start Start, timing is continued. This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears. Lap evaluation Deleting all laps If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall evaluation : ; = ? A RACETIMER overall evaluation Total time driven Average speed Distance covered Maximum speed : ; = ? A Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until a lap evaluation appears. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. X Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, these display messages are deleted as well. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 211) page 192) RParking (Y Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Z 265 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 266 Display messages Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes: currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual RSelf-diagnosis RThe is not yet complete on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual ABS, BAS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The !, ÷, å and J warning lamps may also light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X X Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 267 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 268 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. inoperative See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. T! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRESAFE® are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. A warning tone sounds. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The red ! indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Key: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. ! The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 193). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. Turn on the igni‐ tion to release the parking brake Release parking brake The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 193). ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Z 269 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 270 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. or Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 193). X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 381). X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 193). X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: switch off the ignition. The electric parking brake is applied automatically. or X Insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away (automatic emergency release). X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied, leave the ignition switched on, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed. Z 271 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 272 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake Parking brake inop‐ has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. erative The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Brake immediately Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). You can restart the engine. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Check brake fluid level G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the Mercedes-Benz Contact system are malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Check brake pad wear Inoperative Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Restart the engine. X Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus inoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 273 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 274 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Manual At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems is temporarily restricted or inoperative: RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS PLUS Possible causes: RDISTRONIC Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. All driving systems and driving safety systems are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors (Y page 344) in the following locations: Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. X ü If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle. Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 48). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ý If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts (Y page 46). Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 48). 6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Restraint sys. mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). 6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusFront left malfunc‐ ter. tion Consult work‐ G WARNING shop or Front right malfunction The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintenConsult workshop tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 6 Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop or Rear right malfunction Con‐ sult workshop The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 275 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 276 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The left or right windowbag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Left windowbag mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshop or Right The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally windowbag malfunc‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. tion Consult work‐ This poses an increased risk of injury. shop X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag is disabled during the journey although: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. G WARNING The front-passenger front airbag does not deploy during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat step out of the vehicle. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the frontpassenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis takes place. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain on after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 52) Rthe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Own‐ er's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator Z 277 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 278 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 51). Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag is enabled during the journey although: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. G WARNING The airbag may deploy unintentionally. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure there are no objects applying additional force to the seat. The system may otherwise detect the additional force and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the frontpassenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis takes place. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain on after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 52) Rthe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Own‐ er's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 51). Lights i Vehicles with LED light bulbs in the light clusters: The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Left cornering (Y page 133). light or Right cor‐ or nering light X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 279 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 280 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions. Trailer left tail lamporTrailer lamp Trailer right tail lamp b Trailer left turn signalorTrailer signal Trailer right turn signal b Trailer brake lamp b Rear left indica‐ tor or Rear right indicator b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions. X The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. tor or Right mir‐ ror indicator b The third brake lamp is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Third brake lamp Left brake lamporRight lamp Right brake lamp Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp b Left main beam or Right main beam The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The left- or right-hand foglamp is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Number plate lamp Left fog lamporRight lamp Right fog lamp Rear foglamp Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp Reversing light Left tail lamp or Right tail lamp Z 281 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 282 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Malfunction See Owner's Manual The exterior lighting is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Check the fuses (Y page 367). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the à position. b You are driving without dipped-beam headlamps. X Turn the light switch to the L or à position. Switch off lights Switch on headlamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 338). If you have to top up the coolant frequently: X ? Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked. The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Z 283 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 284 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. If the temperature increases again: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. # See Owner's Manual The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics Rtorn ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Observe the instructions in the # See Owner's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 336). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 337). X If the engine oil needs topping up more often: X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. Add 1 litre engine ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. oil when next refu‐ elling X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 336). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 337). If the engine oil needs topping up more often: X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Z 285 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 286 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 336). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 337). æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ç There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off Reserve fuel level X ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ter Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Take a break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. À Attention Assist inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 211). Off The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 211). Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Clean the windscreen. X Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 287 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 288 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Restart the engine. X Active Blind Spot Assist not availa‐ ble when towing a trailer See Own‐ er's Manual. Manual Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer. You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. led X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 220). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. ative Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 220). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist switched off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. Traffic Sign Assist inoperative Traffic Sign Assist is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 204). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 204). Z 289 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 290 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. rently unavailable Possible causes: See Owner's Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. pended X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - km/h An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 204). DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions SPEEDTRONIC sus‐ pended If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC is switched to passive mode. The speed limitation is not active. X Drive slower than the stored speed and without kickdown. X Call up the last speed stored again. or X Set a new speed. When the display message disappears, the speed limitation is active. Cruise control - - - km/h RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. RESP® is deactivated The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 199). or X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 256). 120 km/h! Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!. km/h! X Drive more slowly. Z 291 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 292 Display messages Tyres Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyres tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped Rthe G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 352). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 376). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inoperative Rectify tyre pres‐ sure The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 376). The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 376). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 378). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 352). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 376). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 352). Ryou Z 293 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 294 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. moni‐ tor currently unavailable No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to strong RF interference. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Depress brake to start engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position N without depressing the brake pedal. X To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine Depress the brake pedal. You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D without starting the engine. X Start the engine. X Depress the brake pedal. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 † you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Risk of vehicle rolling Transmis‐ sion not in P The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Close the driver's door fully. You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. Without changing gear, consult work‐ A warning tone also sounds. shop If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X X Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot drive in Reversing not poss. Consult work‐ reverse. shop X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function Stop The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 295 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 296 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Stop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running The automatic transmission has overheated. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the automatic transmission is available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message goes out. X Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away If necessary, quickly release and engage the clutch The clutch is under considerable load and the permitted operating temperature has been exceeded. A warning tone also sounds. Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Leave the engine running. The clutch is cooled more quickly with the engine running. or X If possible, continue driving at a steady speed. X Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not allow the clutch to slip. The clutch may also cool down during the journey. It may take several minutes for it to cool down. When the clutch has cooled down, the display message disappears. The clutch is fully operational again. For engine start depress clutch You have attempted to start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Restart the engine. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine has stalled while pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal was released too quickly. X Depress the clutch pedal again. The engine starts automatically. X Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away. Trans. oil overhea‐ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated. ted Drive on with Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive care program are no longer available. Engine power output is reduced. X Allow the vehicle to cool down. 4matic currently unavailable 4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. X Drive on. The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly. When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels. 4matic inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. A The tailgate is open. G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. X Close the tailgate. ? The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Close the bonnet. Z 297 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 298 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active bonnet mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a malfunction or because it has already been triggered. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. j The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. Check trailer hitch lock G WARNING If the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Engage the trailer coupling's ball coupling in the end position (Y page 240). & The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 156). X Drive for a considerable distance. The battery charges. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. & There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 156). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. & The auxiliary heating is temporarily malfunctioning or faulty. If the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down: inoperative Bat‐ tery Low inoperative Refuel vehicle inoperative See Owner's Manual X Make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 156). If the auxiliary heating does not switch on: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Power steering mal‐ G WARNING function See Own‐ er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Ð Steering malfunc‐ tion See Owner's Manual Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. G WARNING The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. _ The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Before starting X To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly. the engine, turn the steering wheel. X Insert the key into the ignition lock again. Telephone No ser‐ vice Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 339). Z 299 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 300 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Wiper malfunction‐ ing The windscreen wipers are defective. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hazard warning lamps malfunction‐ ing The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key The key needs to be replaced. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X  The key battery is discharged. X Replace the battery (Y page 90).  The key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Locate the key. Change key batter‐ ies Key not detected (red display message) Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Insert the key into the ignition lock and bring into key mode. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The key is currently undetected. X Change the location of the key in the vehicle. Key not detected (white display message)  Remove starting button, then insert key If the key still cannot be detected: X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. The key is continually undetected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General notes Some systems perform a self test when the ignition is switched on. Some warning and indicator lamps may temporarily switch on or flash during the test. This behaviour is nothing to be concerned about. The warning and indicator lamps will alert you to a malfunction if they switch on or flash after the engine is started or while driving. Safety Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts. tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases. warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. Z 301 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 302 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the The red seat belt warn- same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly ing lamp flashes and an driven faster than 25 km/h. intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J G WARNING The red brake system The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking charwarning lamp is lit while acteristics may be affected. the engine is running. A There is a risk of an accident. warning tone also X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system G WARNING warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Z 303 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 304 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) has been deactivated due to a fault. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist System), COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE®, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE®, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Z 305 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 306 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE®, for example, are also not available. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. !÷åJ The red brake system warning lamp and the yellow ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also not available. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 78) it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 77). å ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts ® to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while G WARNING the engine is running. If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 78) it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 77). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked. M Mercedes-AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 78). Z 307 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 308 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®,ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE® are not available due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 The restraint system is faulty. The red restraint sysG WARNING tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is run- The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. ning. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). Z 309 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 310 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 191). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level warning lamp is on drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 338). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). Z 311 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 312 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 338). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed The red distance warn- selected. ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance. the vehicle is in motion. · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. For further information on the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 73). Tyres Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 352). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 376). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to detect or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 313 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 314 315 Useful information ............................ 316 Loading guidelines ............................ 316 Stowage areas ................................... 316 Stowing and features Features ............................................. 325 316 Stowage areas Useful information Stowing and features i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rthe luggage compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the load compartment as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Ruse the lashing eyelets and the luggage nets to transport loads and luggage. Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening components that are suitable for the weight and size of the load. Rhook in the safety net when loading. Rthe maximum load capacity of the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor is 25 kg. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage areas Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the Stowage areas Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 316). Front stowage compartments Glove compartment To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X There is a pen holder at the top of the glove compartment flap. Spectacles compartment X To open: press marking :. Make sure that the spectacles compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the front centre console Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever X To open: press the marking on cover :. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an ashtray in the centre console instead of the stowage compartment. Z Stowing and features event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the luggage compartment. 317 Stowage areas 318 Stowage compartment in front of the armrest (vehicles with automatic transmission) an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player; see the separate operating instructions Ra mobile phone bracket (Y page 329) Stowage compartment under the driver's and front-passenger seat Stowing and features G WARNING Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever X To open: press the marking on cover :. i You can remove the non-slip mat and the insert for cleaning. When removing the insert you will have to overcome some slight resistance. If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the stowage compartment, the cover is unable to restrain the objects. Objects may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum load of the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the luggage compartment. The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 1.2 kg. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest X To open: on vehicles with moveable armrests, make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost position. X Press button : and fold the armrest up. X Depending on the vehicle equipment, the armrest can be moved backwards or forwards in a longitudinal direction. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage space: Ra multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. On vehicles with a fire extinguisher instead of a stowage compartment, the fire extinguisher is installed under the driver's seat. Stowage areas Stowage compartment in the rear centre console Through-loading facility in the rear compartment X X To open: pull down the top of stowage compartment : by the edge of the handle. X i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, To open: fold down seat armrest :. Pull the centre head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position (Y page 115). there may be an open stowage space above the stowage compartment. Luggage nets Luggage nets are located: Rin the front-passenger footwell the back of the driver's and frontpassenger seat Ron the left and right-hand side in the luggage compartment Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 316) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 316). Ron Slide locking mechanism = in the direction of the arrow. X Swing flap ; fully to the side. Flap ; is held open by a magnet. X To close: swing flap ; in the luggage compartment back until it engages. X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary. X Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 316). Enlarging the luggage compartment Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forZ Stowing and features Rear stowage compartments 319 Stowage areas Stowing and features 320 wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ; of the seat backrest forwards. The corresponding seat backrest : is released. X Fold backrest : forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. ! Before folding the backrest in the rear compartment forwards, make sure that the rear compartment armrest and the cupholder are folded in. They may otherwise be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 316). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the luggage compartment capacity. Folding the rear seat backrest forwards and back Folding the rear seat backrest forward Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 116). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backrests (cargo position) If necessary, press the backrest head restraints down fully (Y page 116). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Stowage areas Fold the seat backrest forward (Y page 320). X Move handle : in the direction of the arrow. X Push back seat backrest ; as far as handle : until the backrest engages. The backrest is now in the cargo position. X Bag hook G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of Securing a load 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. Lashing eyelets General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: Robserve the loading guidelines (Y page 316). Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets. Rdistribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. Rpad sharp edges for protection. Luggage compartment : Lashing eyelets : Bag hook Luggage compartment cover Important safety notes G WARNING On its own, the luggage compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the luggage compartment cover. ! When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the luggage Z Stowing and features Vehicles with luggage compartment package: to enlarge the luggage compartment, you can adjust the rear seat backrests to a 15° steeper angle (cargo position). 321 Stowage areas 322 compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the luggage compartment cover. Stowing and features The luggage compartment cover is located behind the rear bench seat backrest. Extending and retracting the luggage compartment cover To extend: pull luggage compartment cover : towards you by grab handle ; until it engages. X To retract: push the rear edge of luggage compartment cover : downward. Luggage compartment cover : automatically moves forward. X To remove: make sure that the luggage compartment cover is rolled up. X Push in the end cap of luggage compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow on the right or left-hand side using grip = on the lower edge. X Push luggage compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;. X Remove luggage compartment cover : upwards. X To fit: place luggage compartment cover : into anchorage ; on the right or left-hand side. X Push in the opposite end cap of luggage compartment cover : and insert luggage compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;. X Stowing the luggage compartment cover The luggage compartment cover can be folded up to make loading easier. Fitting/removing the luggage compartment cover The luggage compartment cover can be stored in the stowage well underneath the luggage compartment floor. X Open the luggage compartment floor and hang the hook from the luggage compartment floor on the upper seal of the luggage compartment (Y page 324). Press luggage compartment cover : into the luggage compartment side trim panel opening and push forward. X Press the luggage compartment cover further and push it into luggage compartment lip opening ;. X Stowage areas 323 Safety net G WARNING On its own, the safety net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the safety net. It is important to use a safety net if you load the vehicle with small objects above the seat backrests. For safety reasons, always use a safety net when transporting a load. Damaged safety nets can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Attaching and tightening the safety net You have two options for hooking in the safety net: Rwith luggage compartment enlargement: the brackets are behind the B‑pillar and the lashing eyelets to tension the net are on the sides of the rear-compartment footwell. Rwithout luggage compartment enlargement: the brackets are behind the C-pillar and the lashing eyelets to tension the net are in the luggage compartment (Y page 321). The safety net is located in the stowage space under the luggage compartment floor (Y page 324). X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the safety net. X Unroll and unfold the safety net. The joints on the upper and lower guide rod should engage audibly. Safety net (with luggage compartment enlargement) Safety net (without luggage compartment enlargement) To attach and tighten: insert guide rod : into bracket ;. X Attach belt hook ? to the lashing eyelet and pull down on the loose end of the lashing strap until the safety net is taut. X After driving a short distance, check the tension of the safety net and retighten it if necessary. X To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp = up to reduce the tension in the lashing strap. X Unhook belt hook ? from the lashing eyelet. X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;. X To stow: press the red button on the upper and lower guide rod. X Fold the safety net and roll it up. X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the safety net holder. X Z Stowing and features Important safety notes Stowage areas 324 Stowage well under the luggage compartment floor Stowing and features Important safety notes G WARNING If you drive when the luggage compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always close the luggage compartment floor before a journey. X Fold out hook = on the underside of the luggage compartment floor. X Attach hook = to the luggage compartment's upper seal ?. ! The maximum load capacity of the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor is 25 kg. There is a stowage area for TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, a folding box, etc. underneath the luggage compartment floor. Opening/closing the luggage compartment floor To close: detach hook = from upper seal ?. X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the underside of the luggage compartment floor. X Fold the luggage compartment floor down. X Press the luggage compartment floor down until it engages. X To open: open the tailgate. Holding ribbing ;, press handle : downwards. Handle : folds upwards. X Swing the luggage compartment floor upwards using handle : until it rests against the luggage compartment cover. X X Depending on the vehicle equipment, the luggage compartment floor can be locked and unlocked with the emergency key element. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING When a load is transported on the roof, the vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the han- Features ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the panorama sliding sunroof fully and open the tailgate fully when the roof carrier is fitted. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 410). An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Attaching the roof carrier Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING The cup holder cannot secure a drinks container in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot liquid. G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the luggage compartment. Z Stowing and features dling changes. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the handling as well as steering and braking characteristics are severely affected. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the maximum roof load and adapt your driving style. 325 Features 326 ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 316). The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles: Stowing and features Rfront: Rrear: capacity up to 1.0 l capacity up to 0.5 l Cup holders in the front centre console upper section of the cup holder faces forwards. X Press cup holder : downwards until it engages on the right and left-hand sides. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. Two coin holders = and a card holder ; can be found in the cup holder. The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. X To remove: lift the cup holder up : and out with a brief tug. X To fit: insert cup holder : into lateral curved sections ; in the stowage compartment. When doing so, insert the cup holder in such a way that the cant of the Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X X Features 327 Sun visors Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X : ; = ? A Mirror light Retainer Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Rear-compartment ashtray Glare from the side Fold down sun visor :. Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;. X Swing sun visor : to the side. X X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases. X Lift insert ; up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert ; from above into the holder and press down until it engages. X X Z Stowing and features Overview Features 328 Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Stowing and features Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Ra Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X 12 V sockets General notes X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as mobile phone chargers. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-off ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Socket in the front centre console Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X Features 329 To open: press cover : briefly. To make an emergency call: press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. X After the emergency call, close cover :. You will see a message if: X X X X Pull cover : out by its top edge. Lift up the cover of socket ;. Socket in the luggage compartment Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre cannot be made Ra call has not been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre In this case, dial the 112 emergency number on your mobile phone. X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on these requirements can be found in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND Online operating instructions. You can find more information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND Online operating instructions. Mobile phone Important safety notes G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary. Z Stowing and features Socket in the rear-compartment centre console Stowing and features 330 Features You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones is minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial Information on retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 400). Rthe General notes There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones to COMAND Online/Audio 20 can be obtained: Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Ron Using a mobile phone To connect a mobile phone to the exterior aerial and charge it, insert it into the mobile phone bracket. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 318). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed fitting; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. i The mobile phone can also be operated without being in the bracket. However, the charging function and aerial function are not available. In order to use Bluetooth® (SAP profile) on your telephone module, you must first insert the telephone module into the pre-installed fitting. This connects it to the exterior aerial. If you wish to charge the mobile phone, then you must connect it to a USB port. Further information on the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Operating the mobile phone You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile Features scribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. Mobile phone bracket in the stowage compartment Slide the seat backwards. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;. X Remove the floormats. X X You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to improve access to the stowage space beneath it. Further information about the stowage compartment (Y page 318). X To fold the bracket up: press button :. X To fold the bracket down: press the bracket down and allow it to engage. Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as preZ Stowing and features phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 254). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from the vehicle. You can then no longer make calls using the hands-free system. If a call is active and you remove the key from the ignition lock, the conversation is transferred over to the mobile phone. It is then possible to continue the conversation on the mobile phone. 331 332 333 Useful information ............................ 334 Engine compartment ........................ 334 ASSYST PLUS .................................... 339 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 340 334 Engine compartment Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Maintenance and care els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Engine compartment Bonnet Important safety notes G WARNING An unlocked bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlock the bonnet when driving. Before every trip, ensure that the bonnet is locked. G WARNING When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the range of movement of the bonnet. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. If you touch the live components, you could receive an electric shock. There is a danger of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operating principle ! An active bonnet that had been triggered must be repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. The active bonnet function will then be available again. The additional pedestrian protection provided by the active bonnet will then be restored. The active bonnet is only available in certain countries. The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to pedestrians in certain accident situations. Raising the active bonnet increases the clearance to hard components, such as the engine. If the active bonnet has been triggered, it is raised at the rear in the area around the hinge by approximately 60 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the triggered active bonnet yourself. If the active Engine compartment Resetting G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X X With your hand flat, push down active bonnet : in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows) until you feel it engage. If you can raise the active bonnet slightly in the area around the hinges, it is not engaged correctly. Repeat the step. If the bonnet can then still be raised, drive directly to a qualified specialist workshop. Do not drive faster than 100 km/h. Opening the bonnet G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Reach into the gap between the bonnet and the radiator trim and press bonnet catch lever ; to the left. X Raise the bonnet. X Z Maintenance and care bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. 335 Engine compartment 336 When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement Maintenance and care Rthe X X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yellow retaining clip =. Closing the bonnet Raise the bonnet slightly and, at the same time, remove support strut ? from yellow retaining clip =. X Swing support strut ? down and press it into bracket A until it engages. X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Do not press the bonnet closed. Open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force. X Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Engine compartment 337 Example: vehicles with a petrol engine H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Pull dipstick : out of the dipstick tube. Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X X Topping up engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Rusing engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Z Maintenance and care G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. Engine compartment 338 Maintenance and care damage to the engine or engine cooling system. Example: engine oil filler cap Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 336). X X For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 406). Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Open the cap slowly to release the pressure. ! The coolant level must only be checked and corrected when the engine has cooled down (coolant temperature under 40 †). Checking the coolant level when the coolant temperature is over 40 † can lead to Example Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 40 †. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Slowly turn cap : anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X For further information on coolant, see (Y page 408). ASSYST PLUS G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. If the washer fluid level drops below 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to top up the washer fluid (Y page 299). Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 409). ASSYST PLUS Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. You can find information on the type of service and service intervals in the Service Booklet. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 336). The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. days A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. Only for certain countries: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. RService To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X X The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. On vehicles with the headlamp cleaning system, the recommended minimum washer fluid level is 3.5 litres. On vehicles not equipped with the headlamp cleaning system, the recommended minimum washer fluid level is 1 litre. Z Maintenance and care Topping up the windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system 339 Care 340 Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: Maintenance and care Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- Hiding service messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch the ignition on. Press the = or ; button to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X ate stops the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods In these or similar operating conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Rif Driving abroad Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rabrasive Care Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing away a car wash ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed/ airflow control is turned to position 0). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Rthe You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. Z Maintenance and care Rsolvents 341 Care 342 Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. X When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. Maintenance and care High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical ! Edition 1 special model: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehi- cle and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. Care become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: Rvigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. Cleaning vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Maintenance and care ! The following may cause the paint to 343 Care 344 Cleaning the wiper blades Maintenance and care G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. Cleaning the mirror turn signal ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres- sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Care 345 Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the camera cover for cleaning using COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see separate operating instructions). X To clean the reversing camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing the vehicle. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. ! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents, such as sanitary cleanser or wheel cleaner. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers should not be polished with a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For optimal care, the finishers should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Commercially available engine and care oils are suitable for this. Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush. Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. X X i You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch Z Maintenance and care For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfibre cloth. Remove the excess polish residue after polishing. Care 346 carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Maintenance and care Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use a microfibre cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used frequently, this can damage the cover. Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time. Care RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: Runevenness in structure Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rsubtle colour differences These are characteristics of leather and not material faults. seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Seat covers from other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the Z Maintenance and care Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: 347 348 349 Useful information ............................ 350 Where will I find...? ........................... 350 Flat tyre ............................................. 352 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 356 Jump-starting .................................... 360 Towing away and tow-starting ........ 362 Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses ................................. 367 Where will I find...? 350 Useful information Setting up the warning triangle i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Breakdown assistance ist workshops: (Y page 25). Where will I find...? X X Warning triangle Removing/replacing the warning triangle To remove: open the tailgate. X Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards (Y page 324). X To release warning triangle :, push back the retainers on the bracket. X Remove warning triangle : from the bracket. X To replace: place warning triangle : back into the bracket and push down to secure. X Fold down the luggage compartment floor. X Close the tailgate. X Fold feet = out to the side. Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud :. First-aid kit X X Open the tailgate. Remove first-aid kit :. Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Where will I find...? 351 Necessary tyre-changing tools can include, for example: Fire extinguisher RJack RWheel chock wrench RCentring pin RWheel The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front of the driver's seat. X Pull tab : upwards. X Remove fire extinguisher ;. Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. Vehicle tool kit General notes Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor. Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit: the tyrechange tool kit is in the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor. For vehicles with an emergency spare wheel, see "Removing the emergency spare wheel" (Y page 397). i Apart from some country-specific var- iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyrechanging tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tyre changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. : Tyre inflation compressor ; Tyre sealant filler bottle = Towing eye Open the tailgate. Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards (Y page 324). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 353). X X i Towing eye ; is located under tyre inflation compressor :. Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit Open the tailgate. Lift the luggage compartment floor upwards (Y page 324). X Remove the tyre-change tool kit. X X The tyre-change tool kit contains: RJack RWheel wrench pair of gloves RFolding wheel chock ROne Breakdown assistance Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit 352 Flat tyre Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Breakdown assistance RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- acteristics) (Y page 352) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 351) Ran emergency spare wheel (certain countries only) (Y page 396) Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and fitting a wheel (Y page 379). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle at a suitable distance (Y page 350). Observe legal requirements. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) General notes With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the tyre wall. You will find this marking next to the tyre size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the display mes- sages (Y page 292) the tyre for damage Rif driving on, observe the following notes The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. Rcheck Flat tyre Rvehicle holes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Rroad Ryou speed condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. When replacing one or all tyres, observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tyres: Rsize Rtype and "MOExtended" mark. If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot- hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. Z Breakdown assistance In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: 353 Flat tyre 354 If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: Breakdown assistance RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. underneath the luggage compartment floor (Y page 351). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage well Remove filler hose B and connector = from the bottom section of tyre inflation compressor housing ;. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : until the connector engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : into the holder of tyre inflation compressor ;. Yellow cap A and both hooks must engage. X X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X X Insert plug = into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Flat tyre If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure reached" (Y page 355). If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure not reached" (Y page 355). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clear water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Tyre pressure not reached If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filler hose. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). X X H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes: X X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. Z Breakdown assistance Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 328). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press on and off switch ? on the tyre inflation compressor to ON. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). 355 Battery (vehicle) 356 Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. X When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre. X Breakdown assistance G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X To remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information about ABS (Y page 73) and ESP® (Y page 76). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth Rby G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a col- Z 357 Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) 358 Battery (vehicle) lection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. Breakdown assistance ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rin vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Battery (vehicle) Rset the clock via Audio 20 or COMAND Online (see separate operating instructions) Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 120). Charging the battery G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. X X Open the bonnet. Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 360). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for MercedesBenz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. This device permits charging of the battery in position. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 360). Z Breakdown assistance If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will have to: 359 360 Jump-starting Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting 361 Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jump leads are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the bonnet. RThe Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back. Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. Z Breakdown assistance RThe Towing away and tow-starting 362 Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jump leads. X Close the bonnet. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Breakdown assistance X i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing away and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rcar/trailer Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 402). ! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing away a car wash Towing away and tow-starting is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: RSecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. RObserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the front axle or the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing and tow-starting. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of an accident or breakdown, you have the following options: Rtransporting the vehicle As a rule, you should have the vehicle transported. Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission The function of the electric parking brake and the parking lock is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a system malfunction: Rit may not be possible to apply the released parking brake or may not be possible to shift the transmission to position P Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the radio. Deactivate the automatic locking feature before towing the vehicle (Y page 260). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection before towing away the vehicle (Y page 82). Rit Z Breakdown assistance ! Make sure that the electric parking brake 363 Towing away and tow-starting 364 Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye Place the towing eye in the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor (Y page 351). X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: replace the tyre inflation compressor. X Breakdown assistance Towing the vehicle with the front axle raised When towing your vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 362). Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the front axle raised. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool kit under the luggage compartment floor (Y page 351). Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is located under the tyre inflation compressor. X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover : from the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch only have a bracket at the front for the screw-in towing eye. If you intend to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball coupling (Y page 240) and secure the towbar to it. Removing the towing eye X X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the front axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 167). X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. or X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage neutral. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Towing away and tow-starting Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 362). X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 167). Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing away the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. Vehicles with manual or automatic transmission: Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 129). X i In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. Transporting the vehicle 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission X X Vehicles with manual transmission: Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged. All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Z Breakdown assistance Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 82). X Deactivate automatic locking (Y page 260). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 129). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and leave the key in the ignition lock. X 365 Towing away and tow-starting 366 Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage neutral. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Shift the transmission to position N. X As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. Breakdown assistance X The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Vehicles with 4MATIC may only be either towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 360). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic transmission. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 360). Before tow-starting, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe battery is connected engine has cooled down Rthe exhaust system has cooled down When tow-starting, it is important that you observe the safety notes (Y page 362) and the legal requirements in each respective country. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 129). X Fit the towing eye (Y page 364). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage second gear and continue to keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. X When the engine has been started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Rthe Electrical fuses Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rfuse box in the front-passenger footwell The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 368). Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Before replacing a fuse Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Z Breakdown assistance Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 364). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. X 367 Electrical fuses 368 Open the bonnet. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: open clamps ;. X Fold cover : up in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X X To open: open the front-passenger door. Remove the floormat. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the direction of the arrow. X Breakdown assistance X To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the back into openings = on the fuse box. X Fold down cover :. X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close. X Close the bonnet. X To release cover =, press retaining clamp ;. X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow to the catch. X Remove cover = forwards. Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the lower right-hand side of cover =. X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side of the fuse box into the retainer. Cover = engages in the retainers. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audibly. X Fold back perforated floor covering :. X Fit the floormats. X Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. 369 Useful information ............................ 370 Important safety notes ..................... 370 Operation ........................................... 370 Winter operation ............................... 372 Tyre pressure .................................... 374 Changing a wheel .............................. 379 Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 384 Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel ................... 396 370 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Wheels and tyres Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Rlegal stipulations recommendations Information on the sizes and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (Y page 384). Information on tyre pressures can be found: Rfactory Rin the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 189) Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 374) Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving Check the tyre pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be Operation causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure not to squash the tyre sidewalls. If this cannot be avoided, drive slowly over obstacles, e.g. kerbs, and only at an obtuse angle. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres. 371 Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 396). The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: Rdriving style pressure Rmileage Rtyre Regular checking of wheels and tyres G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. Check wheels and tyres for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tyres after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres Rpunctures Rtears in the tyres on the tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 371). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 374). Rbulges G WARNING Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Pay special attention to country-specific requirements for tyre approval. These Z Wheels and tyres Notes on the tyre tread Wheels and tyres 372 Winter operation requirements can stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe here the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 352). ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 396). MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with an activated tyre pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 352). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 379). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. Winter operation Check the tyre pressures (Y page 374). Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 376). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 378). X X Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 396). Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are fitted to the rear wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever fit snow chains on the rear wheels fit snow chains in pairs to the front wheels. Ralways ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheeltyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 384). Ronly use snow chains if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Rwhen snow chains are fitted, never use Active Parking Assist (Y page 220). You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 77) when pulling away with snow chains fitted. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving increased driving force (cutting action). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 396). Z Wheels and tyres At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 204). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: 373 374 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Wheels and tyres Rthe Rat least every two weeks the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rwhen G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. The recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 189). Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel" section (Y page 396). Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear axle is the maximum tyre pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. Additionally, the tyre pressure table may also state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure table apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre Tyre pressure Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the vehicle speed and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Rcause Tyre pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message which appears in the multifunction display in the Serv.menu. Information on the message disServ. play can be found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 376). Important safety notes The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 374). The tyre pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Z Wheels and tyres does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: 375 Tyre pressure 376 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system If you wish to cancel the restart: Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: or Wheels and tyres Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 374). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. Serv.menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the % button. If the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tyre pressure monitor General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example). If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (Y page 377). Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 374). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. Tyre pressure Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 292). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tyre pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tyre pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those meas- ured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. Serv.menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message is shown. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, for a few minutes the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Z Wheels and tyres If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 378). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 374). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: 377 378 Tyre pressure Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tyre pressure warning lamp then lights up. Wheels and tyres RIf the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low. The tyre pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The tyres must be checked. RIf the Tyre pressure Caution Tyre malfunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 292). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. After a few minutes of driving, this is rectified and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 374). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 165). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. Serv.menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for each tyre or the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message. X Press the : button. The multifunction display shows the Use current pressures as new reference values message. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Changing a wheel Country Radio type approval number Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Country Radio type approval number Argentina MW2433A H-12337 GG4 H-12338 South Africa Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Changing a wheel Abu Dhabi Dubai TRA, Registered NO ER0092100/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 Dealer NO: DA0047074/10 Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 Mhz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philippines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 352). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (Y page 352). Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emergency spare wheel is fitted according to the description under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 380). Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tyres Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor 379 Changing a wheel Wheels and tyres 380 Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 379). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tyres are fitted corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably dark place if they are not being used. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Move the front wheels to the straightahead position. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 165). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 192). X i Apart from some country-specific var- iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyrechanging tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for example: RJack RWheel Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X RWheel chock wrench Changing a wheel Securing the vehicle against rolling away 381 jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 351). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to safeguard the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not permissible to use it to perform maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, safeguard it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Do not release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Z Wheels and tyres Rto Changing a wheel 382 Rdo not open or close a door or the tailgate while the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with steel wheels: the hub cap covers the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Wheels and tyres Jacking points The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers fitted next to the jacking points on the outer sills. X Using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim. Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equipment) X X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ; upwards. Changing a wheel X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 379). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. Wheels and tyres Take ratchet ring spanner A out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack ? so that the letters AUF are visible. X Position jack ? at jacking point =. X Turn ratchet ring spanner A until jack ? sits completely on jacking point = and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn ratchet ring spanner A until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. X X Unscrew the wheel bolts. Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the 383 Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Z Wheel and tyre combinations 384 Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible. X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Wheel and tyre combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) Wheels and tyres RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the vehicle again. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 374). X If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. tain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. Wheel and tyre combinations 385 ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. Further information on tyre pressure (Y page 374). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Wheels and tyres RFA: Rwith tyres of the same size across an axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 352). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fitted at the factory in all countries. Z Wheel and tyre combinations 386 Tyres CLA 180 Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 Wheels and tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL8, 9 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 Available as MOExtended tyres. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 9 Only in conjunction with tyre pressure monitor (code 475). 6 7 Wheel and tyre combinations 387 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 180 d Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 BA: 205/55 R16 91 V6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 Wheels and tyres R 17 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL8, 9 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 6 Available as MOExtended tyres. 9 Only in conjunction with tyre pressure monitor (code 475). 7 8 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 388 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 200 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Available as MOExtended tyres. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 9 Only in conjunction with tyre pressure monitor (code 475). 6 7 Wheel and tyre combinations 389 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 200 d Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Available as MOExtended tyres. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 9 Only in conjunction with tyre pressure monitor (code 475). 6 7 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 390 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 200 d 4MATIC Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si6 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Available as MOExtended tyres. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 6 7 Wheel and tyre combinations 391 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 220 d Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 V6, 10 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 Available as MOExtended tyres. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 10 Not in conjunction with AMG Line (Code 950). 9 Only in conjunction with tyre pressure monitor (code 475). 6 7 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 392 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si6, 10 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 Wheels and tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 CLA 220 d 4MATIC Summer tyres R 16 Tyres BA: 205/55 R16 91 Wheels V6, 10 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 Available as MOExtended tyres. in conjunction with AMG Line (Code 950). 7 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 6 10 Not Wheel and tyre combinations 393 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/55 R16 91 H M+Si6, 10 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 49 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 Wheels and tyres CLA 250 Summer tyres R 17 Tyres BA: 225/45 R17 91 Wheels V7 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 RA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50.5 BA: 235/40 R18 95 Y XL11 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Available as MOExtended tyres. in conjunction with AMG Line (Code 950). 7 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 9 Only in conjunction with tyre pressure monitor (code 475). 11 Only in conjunction with AMG Sport package (Code P84). 6 10 Not Z Wheel and tyre combinations 394 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si7, 11 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 CLA 250 4MATIC Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R17 91 V7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 BA: 225/45 R17 91 W6, 7 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 52.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL6, 7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 235/40 R18 95 Y XL11 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i6 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 Available as MOExtended tyres. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 8 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 11 Only in conjunction with AMG Sport package (Code P84). 6 7 Wheel and tyre combinations 395 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si7, 11 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC Summer tyres R 18 Tyres BA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y Wheels XL7 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Tyres Wheels BA: 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XL7, 8 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 19 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+S i BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2 ET 49 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si7, 8 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52 BA: 235/40 R18 95 H XL M+Si7 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Mercedes-AMG CLA 45 4MATIC Summer tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL7 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 11 Only in conjunction with AMG Sport package (Code P84). 7 8 Z Emergency spare wheel 396 R 19 Tyres Wheels BA: 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XL7, 8 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 215/45 R18 93 V XL M+S i BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 42.5 BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+S i7 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes Wheels and tyres G WARNING The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: RAdapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. not switch off ESP®. RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo 7 8 When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. General notes Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with an emergency spare wheel. Emergency spare wheels are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which emergency spare wheels are approved for your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 374). The value on the wheel is valid. In addition, the emergency spare wheel tyre pressure can be found under "Technical data" (Y page 398). An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. Emergency spare wheel 397 If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after fitting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the position where the emergency spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tyres Removing the emergency spare wheel Example: vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is secured in emergency spare wheel bag : in the luggage compartment. X Open the tailgate. X Release securing straps ; on emergency spare wheel bag :. X Remove emergency spare wheel bag : with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. X Open emergency spare wheel bag : and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 380). Z 398 Emergency spare wheel Technical data All models (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) "Minispare" emergency spare wheel12 Tyres Wheels T 125/80 R17 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 19.5 Mercedes-AMG vehicles "Minispare" emergency spare wheel12 Wheels T 125/70 R18 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 18 H2 ET 20 Wheels and tyres Tyres 12 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 399 Useful information ............................ 400 Information on technical data ......... 400 Vehicle electronics ........................... 400 Identification plates ......................... 402 Service products and capacities ..... 402 Vehicle data ....................................... 410 Technical data Trailer tow hitch ................................ 411 400 Vehicle electronics Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 25). Information on technical data Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. tional safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the vehicle electronics, e.g.: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial. Rthe ! The operating permit may be invalidated if Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the opera- the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Robserve Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Observe the notes on operating mobile phones (Y page 329). The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of RF transmitters: Vehicle electronics 401 Approved aerial positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear wing i On vehicles with panorama sliding sun- roof, fitting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear wing, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra cm waveband R2G/3G/4G R70 Z Technical data The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Service products and capacities 402 from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Vehicle identification number (VIN) Technical data X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. VIN ; can be seen. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 402). Only for certain countries: the VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windscreen. Example: vehicles with a trailer tow hitch : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. countries) ? VIN A Maximum permissible gross vehicle Service products and capacities B G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. C D E weight (kg) Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination (kg) (only for specific countries) Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate Important safety notes Service products and capacities Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindscreen washer fluid control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RClimate RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 W-30 R5 W-40 R5 i Further information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Tank capacity Model Total capacity CLA 200 d 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC CLA 250 4MATIC CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC Mercedes-AMG vehicles 56.0 l All other models 50.0 l Z Technical data H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. 403 404 Service products and capacities Model Of which reserve fuel Mercedes-AMG vehicles Approx. 8.0 l All other models Approx. 6.0 l Petrol Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. Technical data ! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON that conforms to the European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626-1 or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) (100% methanol) RPetrol with additives containing metal RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. RM100 Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. CLA 200, CLA 250, CLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 93 RON. All other models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 189). Mercedes-AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON, that conforms to the European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626-1 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. ! As a temporary measure, if the recom- mended fuel is not available, you may also Service products and capacities ! As a temporary measure, if the recom- mended fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol in emergencies with an octane rating of 91 RON. Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle. If no fuel other than petrol with 91 RON or a lower grade is available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop. CLA 250 (only for certain countries). ! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ 85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Diesel Fuel grade G WARNING If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. Rheating ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of Z Technical data use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle. 405 406 Service products and capacities under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with a high sulphur content is available, you will need to carry out your vehicle's oil change at shorter intervals. More information about the interval for oil change can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Technical data Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. Information on refuelling (Y page 189). Low outside temperatures In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the EN 590 standard defines various climatedependent temperature categories. Malfunctions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifications outlined in EN 590. At unusually low outside temperatures, it is possible that the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer areas may not be suitable for operation in colder climatic conditions. i Further information on country-specific fuel properties and fuel types with low-temperature resistance can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road conditions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. Rdriving The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures Rin urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain Rwhen towing a trailer i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emissions values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU Certificate of Conformity). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were, in each case, based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with standards up to and including the EURO 4 standard, in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. Engine oil General notes When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 402). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After Service products and capacities Petrol engines All models Diesel engines with a diesel particle filter MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.5 MB-Freigabe or MBApproval CLA 180 d 226.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 All other models 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 Diesel engines without a diesel particle filter All models MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 228.3, 228.5, 228.51, 229.3, 229.31, 229.5, 229.51, 229.52 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes-AMG vehicles. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: RPetrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3 RDiesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 This must only be added once and the amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Petrol engines Replacement amount CLA 180 CLA 200 5.8 l CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC 5.6 l Mercedes-AMG vehicles 5.5 l All other models 5.6 l Diesel engines Replacement amount CLA 180 d 4.5 l All other models 6.5 l Z Technical data extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB-Freigabe" or "MB-Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines: in certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. 407 408 Service products and capacities Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 402). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Technical data i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals. with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Service products and capacities i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 402). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends coolant or antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1 . i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling washer fluid (Y page 402). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Z Technical data Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. 409 410 Vehicle data Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Model : Maximum headroom ; Opening height CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC 1814 mm 1979 mm Mercedes-AMG vehicles 1790 mm 1956 mm All other models 1810 mm 1975 mm Rthe Technical data heights specified may vary as a result of: - Tyres - Load - Condition of the suspension - Optional equipment ROptional equipment reduces the maximum payload RVehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 402). ROnly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (Certificate of Conformity). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC Dimensions and weights Vehicle length Vehicle height Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors Wheel base Maximum roof load Maximum boot load Mercedes-AMG vehicles Vehicle length 4691 mm Vehicle height 1417 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2032 mm Trailer tow hitch 411 Mercedes-AMG vehicles Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1777 mm Wheel base 2699 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg All other models 4630 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2032 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1777 mm Wheel base 2699 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Model Vehicle height CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC 1439 mm All other models 1435 mm : Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 239). For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension including protective covering is 1121 mm. Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis. Z Technical data Vehicle length 412 Trailer tow hitch Trailer loads Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8% from a standstill) Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 239). Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission Automatic transmission 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 200 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 200 d 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 180 CLA 180 d CLA 250 1500 kg Technical data Automatic transmission CLA 200 d 1500 kg CLA 220 d 1500 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 1500 kg CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC 1500 kg Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 239). Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission Automatic transmission 1200 kg 1200 kg CLA 200 1400 kg 1400 kg CLA 200 d 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 180 CLA 180 d CLA 250 1500 kg Trailer tow hitch 413 Automatic transmission CLA 200 d 1500 kg CLA 220 d 1500 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 1500 kg CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC 1500 kg Permissible trailer load, unbraked Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 239). Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission Automatic transmission 715 kg 730 kg CLA 200 715 kg 730 kg CLA 200 d 750 kg 750 kg CLA 180 CLA 180 d CLA 250 Technical data 750 kg Automatic transmission CLA 200 d 750 kg CLA 220 d 750 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 750 kg CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC 750 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload. Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 239). The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Z 414 Trailer tow hitch Manual transmission Automatic transmission 75 kg 75 kg CLA 200 75 kg 75 kg CLA 200 d 75 kg 75 kg CLA 180 CLA 180 d CLA 250 75 kg Automatic transmission CLA 200 d 75 kg CLA 220 d 75 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 75 kg Technical data CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC CLA 220 d 4MATIC 75 kg CLA 220 d 4MATIC 75 kg The actual noseweight must not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball coupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ball coupling. Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 239). Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Manual transmission Automatic transmission 1030 kg 1030 kg CLA 200 1030 kg 1030 kg CLA 200 d 1035 kg 1030 kg CLA 180 CLA 180 d CLA 250 1040 kg Trailer tow hitch 415 Automatic transmission CLA 200 d 1080 kg CLA 220 d 1030 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 1080 kg CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC 1080 kg Technical data CLA 220 d 4MATIC Z 416